advertisement
UX-P450US.book Page 1 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
微型組合音響
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
— 由 CA-UXP450 及 SP-UXP450 組成
中
文
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
使用說明書
GVT0129-008A
[US/UN]
UX-P450US.book Page 1 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM
Warnings, Cautions and Others/ 警告,注意及其他須知事項
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely
(all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights
• in red.
When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.
The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
注意 — STANDBY/ON
無論 STANDBY/ON
開關 !
開關在任何位置,電源線的電源還是
沒 有被切 斷,若要將 電源完 全關閉,應 把電 源插頭 拔离插 座
(所有的燈和信息均熄滅)。
• 當主機正處于備用狀態, STANDBY/ON 燈為紅色。
• 當主機開啟后, STANDBY/ON 燈為綠色。
電源開關可用遙控器控制。
注意
為了減少触電,火災等危險:
1.
切勿擅自卸下螺絲釘,蓋子或機殼。
2.
切勿讓本機受雨淋或置潮濕環境中。
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
• newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.
•
•
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
注意
• 切勿堵塞通風口或通風孔。
( 如果通風口或通風孔被報紙或布等堵塞,熱量將無法散
出。)
• 切勿在本設備上放置任何裸露的火源,如點燃的蜡燭。
• 處理廢棄電池時,必須考慮環境問題 ,并嚴格遵守當地關
于處理廢棄電池的有關法律或規定。
• 切勿將本裝置暴露于雨水所及,潮濕 ,滴水或濺起水花的
地方,亦不要將任何裝滿液体的物件 ( 如花瓶 ) 放置在本
裝置上。
鐳射產品的重要說明
1.
一級鐳射產品。
2.
注意: 切勿打開頂蓋板。本机內部沒有用戶可自行維修的部
件;所有維修工作應由有資格的人員完成。
3.
注意: 當內部鎖定裝置失效或者損坏后,打開蓋板可能會產
生可見或不可見的鐳射輻射。應避免受到鐳射光束的直接照
射。
4.
標簽的復制標示:注意標簽位于機內。
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of
10 cm or more.
15 cm
15
1 cm
1
15 cm
15
1 cm
1
15 cm
15
注意 : 正确通風
為免發生触電和火警的危險,及防止本機受損,請將本機如下
放置:
1.
前面:沒有障礙物及地方開闊。
2.
側面 / 頂面 / 背面:在圖中所示范圍中,不應放置任何障礙
物。
3.
底部:放置在水平面上。放置在一個高 10 厘米或以上的臺
上,以保証足夠的通風道。
15 cm
15
15 cm
15
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450
10 cm
10
CA-UXP450
G-1
UX-P450USTOC.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:54 PM
Contents
Introduction ..................................................... 2
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27
Getting Started................................................. 3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29
Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29
Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30
Before Operating the System.......................... 7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Timer Operations .......................................... 31
Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31
Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33
Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ................................................... 15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level ............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................ 39
Maintenance .................................................................. 41
Troubleshooting............................................................. 42
Language Code List....................................................... 43
Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45
Specifications ................................................................ 46
Parts Index ..................................................................... 46
Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18
Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback .................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Introduction.fm Page 2 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
2
Introduction
Precautions
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.
If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button briefly .
Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.
2 sec.
Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).
• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).
DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.
Remote
ONLY
Main Unit
ONLY
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.
Introduction.fm Page 3 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
Getting Started
Step 1
:Unpack the package and check the accessories.
Step 2
: Prepare the remote control.
Step
1
: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
• AC plug adaptor (1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step
2
: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
2
Step 3
: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Finally plug the AC power cord.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied AC plug adaptor.
Now you can operate the System.
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.
3
Connection.fm Page 4 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
Step
3
: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM antenna
(not supplied)
Before connecting optical digital cord
Remove the protective cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
TV
DECODER
AUX
VCR, etc.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Y
P
B
P
R
AV
COMPU LINK
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75
Ω
wire with coaxial type connector.
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
LEFT
RIGHT
White
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
4
Connection.fm Page 5 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.
Before plugging in the System
Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector on the rear.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so that the voltage marker is pointing at the same voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See also the back cover page.)
Voltage marker
OPEN
PUSH
REVERSE
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
PAL
NTSC
Y
S-VIDEO
P
R
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage selector and all connection procedures are complete.
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Connection.fm Page 6 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
To connect the AM loop antenna
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.
Changing the Scanning Mode
Remote
ONLY
This System supports progressive scanning.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
0
PROGRE
INTER
PROGRE
INTER
(at the same time)
Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Connection.fm Page 7 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
Before Operating the System
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
Disc Type Mark (Logo)
Video
Format
Region
Code*
Number
DVD Video
3 or
ALL
DVD Audio
Video CD
(VCD)
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
SUPER VIDEO
NTSC or
PAL
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio formats.
• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.
• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.
• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.
• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“3.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0
+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
7
Connection.fm Page 8 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
9 p q w e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
2 Daily Timer indicators
• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.
3 SLEEP indicator
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3
(tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
•
–
(reverse mode):
: tape play continues endlessly.
–
–
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9 Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
• (repeat)/ALL:
– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.
8
Connection.fm Page 9 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:53 PM
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
• DVD Video:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:
Total title no.
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD: • Audio CD:
Total group no.
Group no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
• SVCD/VCD:
Total playing time
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time *
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
Total track no.
Total playing time *
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG: • JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current group no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
Current file no.
9
Basic.fm Page 10 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
10 keys
ENTER
TOP MENU
2
8
GROUP/TITLE
4 / ¢
SHIFT
1
2
DVD/CD
3
4
VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
Daily Operations
—Playback
1
SET
MENU
, , ,
RETURN
7
1 / ¡
3D PHONIC
3
In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.
1
Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.
2
Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.
3
Adjust the volume.
4
Operate the target source as explained later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.
10
Basic.fm Page 11 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
1 Select the AM band.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Remote control: Main unit:
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
2 sec.
UP
FM AM
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
9
DOWN
While holding...
UP
While holding...
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
(at the same time)
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
1
2
Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.
Activate the preset number entry mode.
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM AM
11
Basic.fm Page 12 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Examples:
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4
Store the station.
SET
To start: To stop:
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM
Remote
ONLY
AM
To change the tape running direction
3
(forward play)
2
(reverse play)
To reverse the tape automatically
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
• You can also use the
¡
or
1
buttons.
10 10
Playing Back a Tape
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push Insert Close
With the tape side facing outside
(at the same time)
Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.
Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Disc
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.
If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.
12
Basic.fm Page 13 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes
“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
On-screen guide icons
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:
At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.
At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.
, , , , ,
To close the disc tray, press
0
again.
• If you press DVD/CD
3
, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).
To start: To pause: To stop:
DVD/CD
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
GROUP/TITLE
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD
3
(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press
7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
• First time you press
4
, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
SLOW – SLOW
+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
x60
13
Basic.fm Page 14 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Remote
ONLY
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
7
For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:
GROUP/TITLE
Moves to the next page.
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
PHONIC
3D PHONIC ACTION
3D PHONIC OFF
(Canceled)
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
DRAMA
THEATER
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.
DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
To play back using the disc menu
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
Remote
ONLY
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
Moves to the previous page.
To return to the previous menu:
CANCEL
RETURN
(at the same time)
To cancel PBC
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Select a track.
Stop playback.
Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press
7
(twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD
3
.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.
14
Basic.fm Page 15 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Daily Operations
—Sound & Other Adjustments
Remote control
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control: Main unit:
VOLUME DVD LEVEL
CLOCK/
TIMER
ENTER
VFP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SET
, , ,
VOLUME
FADE
MUTING
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.
BASS/TREBLE
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME
+/–
FADE
MUTING
Adjusting the Sound
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Basic.fm Page 16 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
Remote
ONLY
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.
DVD LEVEL
5
NORMAL MIDDLE
HIGH
(at the same time)
NORMAL Original recording level.
MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
HIGH Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
VFP
GAMMA
BRIGHTNESS
6
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
(at the same time) On the TV
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
Remote
ONLY
DIMMER
DIM1
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
DIM2
AUTO DIM
DIM1
DIM2
Dims the display.
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when playback stops.
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
ENTER
GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Basic.fm Page 17 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
Turning Off the Power
Automatically
Remote
ONLY
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
On
Canceled
Setting the Clock
Remote
ONLY
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.
2
Adjust the hour.
SET
(at the same time)
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
10 20 30 60 90 120
Canceled
150
3 Adjust the minute.
SET
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SLEEP
Now the built-in clock starts working.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.
17
UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
Remote control
SUB TITLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
, , ,
DVD/CD
3
8
SHIFT
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
ANGLE
10 keys
Selecting the View Angle
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
ANGLE
3
ENTER
7
SLOW –/+
Ex.:
1/3
1
1/3
1
(at the same time)
2/3
2
2/3
2
3/3
3
3/3
3
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1
Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
SUB TITLE
2
1/3
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
18
UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
2
Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
3/3
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3 2/3
1 2
3/3
3
While playing an SVCD video...
SUB TITLE
2
–/4
OFF
(at the same time)
1/4
1
4/4
4
3/4
3
AUDIO
1
(at the same time)
2/4
2
Selecting the Audio Track
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
AUDIO
1
SVCD
ST1
R2
VCD
ST
ST2
L2
L
(at the same time)
L1
R1
R
ST1/ST2
ST
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Remote
ONLY
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
1
Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.
19
UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:52 PM
2
Enter the key number.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.
To cancel the key number entry, press
7
.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
Remote
ONLY
To start still picture playback:
While playing...
To resume normal playback:
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
1
2
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
Advance the still picture frame by frame.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
Slow-motion playback
1
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
2
Select slow motion speed.
SLOW – SLOW +
Forward slow motion starts.
Reverse slow motion* starts.
SLOW
+
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
SLOW –
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).
Zoom
1
Remote
ONLY
While playing back...
ZOOM
4
(at the same time)
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
Remote control
10 keys
,
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
Main unit
DVD/CD
3
4 , 7 , ¢
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Program Play
Remote
ONLY
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1
Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
ENTER
CANCEL
7
PLAY
MODE
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PRGM
On the display
PROGRAM
No
1
8
9
6
7
10
2
3
4
5
Group/Title Track/Chapter
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2
Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
1 Select a title or group number.
2
3
Select a chapter or track number.
Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
0
21
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
3
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
Playing at Random—Random Play
Remote
ONLY
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1
Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To skip a step:
GROUP/TITLE
To pause:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
To stop:
RANDOM
2
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.
In the programmed order.
• You can also use
4
or
¢
to check the programmed contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To skip a chapter/ track:
To pause: To stop:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 .
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
22
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
Playing Repeatedly
Remote
ONLY
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP CHAP
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP TTL
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP GRP
REP OFF
(Canceled)
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP GRP
REP ALL
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP ALL
REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK * Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.
REP STEP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
A-B Repeat
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.
1
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
starts flashing on the display.
• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.
(at the same time)
2
Select the end point (B).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
stops flashing.
•
TV.
A-B appears on the
• You can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
(at the same time)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
Main Unit
ONLY
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
While the disc tray is closed...
(at the same time)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
23
OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
24
On-Screen Disc Operations
Remote control
ZOOM
, , ,
ON SCREEN
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
On-screen bars
DVD Video
1
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
DVD Audio
1
2 3
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4
2 3
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF
SVCD
1
SVCD
TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3
4
2 3
TITLE 14
/ 1/3
CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
VCD
1
VCD
2
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
3
4
CD
1 2 3
CD TITLE 14 CHAP
1/3
23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
10 keys
ENTER
CANCEL
7
REPEAT
¡
On-screen Bar Information
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
Mbps Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
TITLE 2 Current title
CHAP 3
GROUP 1
TRACK 14
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications
3 Operation modes
Indication Meanings
Playback
/
/ Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
OFF
CHAP.
TRACK
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1/3
1/3
1/3
PAGE 1 / 5
Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).
Select to change the page.
OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
Remote
ONLY
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
1
Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
14
1 / 1/3
23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 1/3
Goes off
2
Select (highlight) the item you want.
For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
ENTER
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
3
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER
TITLE 14
1
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
ENGLISH
4
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 1/3
23
2 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
FRENCH
5
Finish the setting.
ENTER
Pop-up window goes off.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
TIME
REM
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.
Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
OFF
25
OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
A-B
TITLE
TRACK *
OFF
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.
CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3
OFF
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.
2 Select .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
• last two digits in the examples above).
To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.
4 Select “A-B.”
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 / 1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
ENTER
DVD-VIDEO
A-
8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CH
1 / 1/3
6 Select the end point (B).
ENTER
A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
2 Select CHAP.
or TRACK .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
CHAP.
CHAPTER _
1 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
26
OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
PROGRESSIVE
0
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.
To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
Operations on t he CONTROL Screen
Remote
ONLY
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
1
2
3
4
Group : 2 / 3
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Winter sky.mp3
6
7
8
9
0
-
5
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
Track list
27
OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:51 PM
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:
Moves the bar to the track list.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP GRP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1
While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press
8
to display the still picture, then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
ENTER
Playback starts with the selected track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.
(at the same time)
For JPEG:
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ENTER
The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
DVD/CD
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press
8
.
To skip a track:
GROUP/TITLE
To stop playback:
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
28
AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
Remote control
REV. MODE
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
7
SHIFT
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1
Insert a recordable cassette.
Push Insert Close
FM/AM
AUX
With the tape side facing outside
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Main unit
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
REC
PUSH OPEN 0
FM/AM
AUX
7
Tape direction indicator
To change the direction
Current source
3
(forward)
2
(reverse)
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(
(at the same time)
)
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
3
Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
4
Start recording.
REC
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.
To stop recording:
On the main unit
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
1
Start playing a disc.
DVD/CD
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.
To record the entire disc
1
Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD
3
, then
7
.
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3
Start recording.
REC
The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.
2
While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...
REC
On the main unit
The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.
3
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
On the main unit
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD
3
, then
8
) before pressing REC.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.
30
Timer.fm Page 31 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
Remote control
SET
,
Timer Operations
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
CANCEL
Setting the Timer
Remote
ONLY
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1
Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2
Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—
SET
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For Daily Timers:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.
31
Timer.fm Page 32 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
5 Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
For Recording Timer:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
4
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
3
Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
Canceled Clock setting
(see page 17)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
1
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
CANCEL
RETURN
To turn on the Timer
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
Remote control
, , ,
SHIFT
Setup Menu Icons
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
1 2 3 4
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Setup Menu Operations
10 keys
SET UP
ENTER
.
Operating Procedure
Remote
ONLY
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
2
Select one of the Setup Menus.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3
Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
6
Finish the setting.
ENTER
7
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
Setup Menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
SUBTITLE
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
To exit from the Setup Menu
SET UP
MENU
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.
(at the same time)
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
MONITOR TYPE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.
34
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).
Select one of the following:
AUTO:
FILM:
Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.
Select one of the following:
ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.
Select one of the following:
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.
DOLBY DIGITAL
/PCM:
To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND:
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
35
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.
ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.
OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
RESUME
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate Resume.
OFF: To cancel Resume.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
TV.
DVD2:
DVD3:
To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
TV.
To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
PARENTAL LOCK
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
36
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
Restricting the Review
—Parental Lock
Remote
ONLY
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
5
Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
NC
NE
NF
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6
Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
(at the same time)
2
Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
7
Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
5
4
3
8
7
8
Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3
Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
MY
NONE
_ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.
9
Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
10
Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:50 PM
To change the setting
1
Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
MY
4
_ _ _ _
PA R E N TA L L O C K
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD _ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
3
Change the settings.
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4
Enter your password again (after selecting
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.
1
Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
ENTER
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
38
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Additional Information
Learning More about This System
Getting Started
(see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.
Before Operating the System
(see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback
(see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Tape:
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
(see pages 18 to 20)
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Advanced Disc Operations
(see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
39
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
On-Screen Disc Operations
(see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.
Advanced Tape Operations
(see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.
and
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
)
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to
3
)
, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
Timer Operations
(see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Setup Menu Operations
(see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Hierarchy
Level 3 Level 4
01 03 04
02
1
2
3
4
5
6
05
7
8
Level 5
9
10
11
12
01
Group with its play order
1
Track with its play order
40
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.
]
There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
]
The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.
Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
]
The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.
]
The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
]
Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
]
Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
]
The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
]
The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.
]
Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
]
Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
]
]
The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
]
The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.
]
The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
]
The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).
You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
“NO AUDIO” appears.
]
This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
“LR ONLY” appears.
]
Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
]
The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc tray does not open or close.
]
The AC power cord is not plugged in.
]
Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
]
Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
]
The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
]
The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
]
Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Setup Menu Operations:
No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).
42
AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Language Code List
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
43
AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Country/Area Codes List
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
√
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
AQ
AR
AS
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
AT
AU
Austria
Australia
AW Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
BG
BH
BI
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
BJ Benin
BM Bermuda
BN Brunei Darussalam
BO
BR
BS
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
BT
BV
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
BW Botswana
BY
BZ
CA
Belarus
Belize
Canada
CC
CF
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
CG Congo
CH Switzerland
CI Côte d’Ivoire
CK Cook Islands
CL Chile
CM Cameroon
CN China
CO Colombia
CR Costa Rica
CU Cuba
CV
CX
CY
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
CZ
DE
DJ
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
44
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
DK Denmark
DM Dominica
DO Dominican Republic
DZ
EC
EE
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
Ethiopia
Finland
FJ
FK
Fiji
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
FM Micronesia (Federated States of)
FO Faroe Islands
FR
FX
France
France, Metropolitan
GA Gabon
GB United Kingdom
GD Grenada
GE Georgia
GF French Guiana
GH Ghana
GI Gibraltar
GL Greenland
GM Gambia
GN Guinea
GP Guadeloupe
GQ Equatorial Guinea
GR Greece
GS
GT
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
GU Guam
GW Guinea-Bissau
GY Guyana
HK Hong Kong
HM Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
JM
HN Honduras
HR Croatia
HT Haiti
HU Hungary
ID Indonesia
IE Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
KE Kenya
KG Kyrgyzstan
KH Cambodia
KI Kiribati
KM Comoros
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis
KP Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
KR Korea, Republic of
KW Kuwait
KY Cayman Islands
KZ Kazakhstan
LA Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
LB
LC
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
LI Liechtenstein
LK Sri Lanka
LR Liberia
LS
LT
LU
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
LV
LY
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
MA Morocco
MC Monaco
MD Moldova, Republic of
MG Madagascar
MH Marshall Islands
ML Mali
MM Myanmar
MN Mongolia
MO Macau
MP Northern Mariana Islands
MQ Martinique
MR Mauritania
MS Montserrat
MT Malta
MU Mauritius
MV Maldives
MW Malawi
MX Mexico
MY Malaysia
MZ Mozambique
NA Namibia
NC New Caledonia
NE Niger
NF Norfolk Island
NG Nigeria
NI Nicaragua
NL Netherlands
NO Norway
AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
NP Nepal
NR Nauru
NU Niue
NZ New Zealand
OM Oman
PA Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon
PN Pitcairn
PR Puerto Rico
PT Portugal
PW Palau
PY Paraguay
QA Qatar
RE Réunion
RO Romania
RU Russian Federation
RW Rwanda
SA Saudi Arabia
SB
SC
SD
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
SE
SG
SH
SI
SJ
SK
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
SL Sierra Leone
SM San Marino
SN Senegal
SO
SR
ST
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
TG
TH
TJ
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
TK Tokelau
TM Turkmenistan
TN Tunisia
TO
TP
TR
Tonga
East Timor
Turkey
TT
TV
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
TW Taiwan
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of
UA Ukraine
UG Uganda
UM United States Minor Outlying
Islands
US United States
UY Uruguay
UZ Uzbekistan
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)
VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
VE Venezuela
VG Virgin Islands (British)
VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)
VN Vietnam
VU Vanuatu
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands
WS Samoa
YE Yemen
YT Mayotte
YU Yugoslavia
ZA South Africa
ZM Zambia
ZR Zaire
ZW Zimbabwe
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Playback disc
DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
MP3/WMA disc
STREAM/PCM
DTS bitstream
Output Signals
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Wednesday, May 19, 2004 5:49 PM
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Audio Input
Digital output:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4
AUX:
Ω
(10% THD)
400 mV/50 k
Ω
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(P
B
/P
R
)
Speakers/Impedance:
NTSC/PAL selectable
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75
4
Ω
– 16
Ω
Ω
Tuner section
FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
Tape section
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range: 90 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
2.2 kg each
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
General
Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/
AC 230 V – AC 240 V (adjustable with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption: 65 W (at operation)
Dimensions (approx.):
4.1 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
Mass (approx.):
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Remote control
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
10, 13, 22, 28
9, 17
14
11, 16–20,
23
Main unit
8
Remote sensor
10, 11
10–13,
22, 28
30
11, 13
20
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7
10
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
SET
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN CANCEL
RETURN
DVD/CD TAPE
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +
DISPLAY
3D
PHONIC
BASS/
TREBLE RHYTHM AX
DIMMER
FADE
MUTING
VOLUME
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
STANDBY/ON
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX
REC DOWN UP
VOLUME
PHONES
10
17
17, 31
14, 20,
25–31, 33
11, 13,
20–23, 28
15
15
10, 15
16
15
12
14
15
10, 11,
15
13, 23
10
46
UX-P450US.book Page 2 Friday, May 21, 2004 11:24 AM
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,
Australia, and U.K.)
主 (
AC
) 電源線路 ( 不適用于歐洲、美國、加拿大、澳洲及英國型號 )
PUSH OPEN
SE
ER
EV
TO
AU
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDE
SELE
O
CT
PAL
NTSC
Y
P
B
S-VIDEO
P
R
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
有關主 ( AC ) 電源線路的重要事項
接插電源以前,務請檢查當地的主 ( AC ) 電
源線路電壓是否和位于本机外面的電壓選擇
開關設定的位置一致。如果不一致,即重新
設定電壓選擇開關使符合當地電壓,以免損
坏机器或引起火災 / 触電的危險。
EN, CS
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
0504AIMMDWJEM
Cover[UX].fm Page 1 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:00 AM
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0129-009A
[UX]
Safty[UX].fm Page 1 Thursday, June 3, 2004 3:30 PM
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all lamps and indications go off).
The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in red.
• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.
The power can be remote controlled.
G-1
Safty[UX].fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:10 AM
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
G-2
Safty[UX].fm Page 3 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:10 AM
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service
3.
personnel.
CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE THE UNIT.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
G-3
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450
UX-P450UXTOC.fm Page 1 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM
Contents
Introduction ..................................................... 2
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27
Getting Started................................................. 3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29
Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29
Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30
Before Operating the System.......................... 7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Timer Operations .......................................... 31
Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31
Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33
Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ................................................... 15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level ............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................ 39
Maintenance .................................................................. 41
Troubleshooting............................................................. 42
Language Code List....................................................... 43
Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45
Specifications ................................................................ 46
Parts Index ..................................................................... 46
Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18
Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback .................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Introduction.fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM
2
Introduction
Precautions
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.
If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button briefly .
Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.
2 sec.
Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).
• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).
DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.
Remote
ONLY
Main Unit
ONLY
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.
Introduction.fm Page 3 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:45 AM
Getting Started
Step 1
:Unpack the package and check the accessories.
Step 2
: Prepare the remote control.
Step
1
: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
• AC plug adaptor (1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step
2
: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
2
Step 3
: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Finally plug the AC power cord.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug, use the supplied AC plug adaptor.
Now you can operate the System.
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.
3
Connection.fm Page 4 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
Step
3
: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM antenna
(not supplied)
Before connecting optical digital cord
Remove the protective cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
TV
DECODER
AUX
VCR, etc.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Y
P
B
P
R
AV
COMPU LINK
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75
Ω
wire with coaxial type connector.
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
LEFT
RIGHT
White
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
4
Connection.fm Page 5 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.
Before plugging in the System
Set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector on the rear.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the voltage selector so that the voltage marker is pointing at the same voltage as where you are plugging in the unit. (See also the back cover page.)
Voltage marker
PUSH OPEN
O REVERSE
AUT
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
PAL
NTSC
Y
S-VIDEO
P
R
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage selector and all connection procedures are complete.
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Connection.fm Page 6 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
To connect the AM loop antenna
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.
Changing the Scanning Mode
Remote
ONLY
This System supports progressive scanning.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
0
PROGRE
INTER
PROGRE
INTER
(at the same time)
Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Connection.fm Page 7 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
Before Operating the System
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
Disc Type Mark (Logo)
Video
Format
Region
Code*
Number
DVD Video
2 or
ALL
DVD Audio
Video CD
(VCD)
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
SUPER VIDEO
NTSC or
PAL
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio formats.
• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.
• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.
• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.
• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“2.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0
+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
7
Connection.fm Page 8 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
9 p q w e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
2 Daily Timer indicators
• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.
3 SLEEP indicator
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3
(tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
•
–
(reverse mode):
: tape play continues endlessly.
–
–
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9 Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
• (repeat)/ALL:
– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.
8
Connection.fm Page 9 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:44 AM
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
• DVD Video:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:
Total title no.
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD: • Audio CD:
Total group no.
Group no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
• SVCD/VCD:
Total playing time
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time *
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
Total track no.
Total playing time *
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG: • JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current group no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
Current file no.
9
Basic.fm Page 10 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
10 keys
ENTER
TOP MENU
2
8
GROUP/TITLE
4 / ¢
SHIFT
1
2
DVD/CD
3
4
VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
Daily Operations
—Playback
1
SET
MENU
, , ,
RETURN
7
1 / ¡
3D PHONIC
3
In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.
1
Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.
2
Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.
3
Adjust the volume.
4
Operate the target source as explained later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.
10
Basic.fm Page 11 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
1 Select the AM band.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Remote control: Main unit:
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
2 sec.
UP
FM AM
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
9
DOWN
While holding...
UP
While holding...
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
(at the same time)
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
1
2
Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.
Activate the preset number entry mode.
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM AM
11
Basic.fm Page 12 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Examples:
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4
Store the station.
SET
To start: To stop:
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM
Remote
ONLY
AM
To change the tape running direction
3
(forward play)
2
(reverse play)
To reverse the tape automatically
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
• You can also use the
¡
or
1
buttons.
10 10
Playing Back a Tape
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push Insert Close
With the tape side facing outside
(at the same time)
Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.
Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Disc
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.
If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.
12
Basic.fm Page 13 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes
“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
On-screen guide icons
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:
At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.
At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.
, , , , ,
To close the disc tray, press
0
again.
• If you press DVD/CD
3
, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).
To start: To pause: To stop:
DVD/CD
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
GROUP/TITLE
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD
3
(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press
7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
• First time you press
4
, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
SLOW – SLOW
+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
x60
13
Basic.fm Page 14 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Remote
ONLY
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
7
For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:
GROUP/TITLE
Moves to the next page.
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
PHONIC
3D PHONIC ACTION
3D PHONIC OFF
(Canceled)
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
DRAMA
THEATER
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.
DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
To play back using the disc menu
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
Remote
ONLY
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
Moves to the previous page.
To return to the previous menu:
CANCEL
RETURN
(at the same time)
To cancel PBC
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Select a track.
Stop playback.
Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press
7
(twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD
3
.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.
14
Basic.fm Page 15 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Daily Operations
—Sound & Other Adjustments
Remote control
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control: Main unit:
VOLUME DVD LEVEL
CLOCK/
TIMER
ENTER
VFP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SET
, , ,
VOLUME
FADE
MUTING
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.
BASS/TREBLE
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME
+/–
FADE
MUTING
Adjusting the Sound
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Basic.fm Page 16 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
Remote
ONLY
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.
DVD LEVEL
5
NORMAL MIDDLE
HIGH
(at the same time)
NORMAL Original recording level.
MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
HIGH Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
VFP
GAMMA
BRIGHTNESS
6
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
(at the same time) On the TV
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
Remote
ONLY
DIMMER
DIM1
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
DIM2
AUTO DIM
DIM1
DIM2
Dims the display.
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when playback stops.
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
ENTER
GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Basic.fm Page 17 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
Turning Off the Power
Automatically
Remote
ONLY
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
On
Canceled
Setting the Clock
Remote
ONLY
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.
2
Adjust the hour.
SET
(at the same time)
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
10 20 30 60 90 120
Canceled
150
3 Adjust the minute.
SET
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SLEEP
Now the built-in clock starts working.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.
17
UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
Remote control
SUB TITLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
, , ,
DVD/CD
3
8
SHIFT
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
ANGLE
10 keys
Selecting the View Angle
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
ANGLE
3
ENTER
7
SLOW –/+
Ex.:
1/3
1
1/3
1
(at the same time)
2/3
2
2/3
2
3/3
3
3/3
3
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1
Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
SUB TITLE
2
1/3
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
18
UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
2
Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
3/3
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3 2/3
1 2
3/3
3
While playing an SVCD video...
SUB TITLE
2
–/4
OFF
(at the same time)
1/4
1
4/4
4
3/4
3
AUDIO
1
(at the same time)
2/4
2
Selecting the Audio Track
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
AUDIO
1
SVCD
ST1
R2
VCD
ST
ST2
L2
L
(at the same time)
L1
R1
R
ST1/ST2
ST
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Remote
ONLY
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
1
Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.
19
UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:43 AM
2
Enter the key number.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.
To cancel the key number entry, press
7
.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
Remote
ONLY
To start still picture playback:
While playing...
To resume normal playback:
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
1
2
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
Advance the still picture frame by frame.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
Slow-motion playback
1
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
2
Select slow motion speed.
SLOW – SLOW +
Forward slow motion starts.
Reverse slow motion* starts.
SLOW
+
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
SLOW –
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).
Zoom
1
Remote
ONLY
While playing back...
ZOOM
4
(at the same time)
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
Remote control
10 keys
,
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
Main unit
DVD/CD
3
4 , 7 , ¢
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Program Play
Remote
ONLY
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1
Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
ENTER
CANCEL
7
PLAY
MODE
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PRGM
On the display
PROGRAM
No
1
8
9
6
7
10
2
3
4
5
Group/Title Track/Chapter
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2
Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
1 Select a title or group number.
2
3
Select a chapter or track number.
Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
0
21
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
3
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
Playing at Random—Random Play
Remote
ONLY
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1
Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To skip a step:
GROUP/TITLE
To pause:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
To stop:
RANDOM
2
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.
In the programmed order.
• You can also use
4
or
¢
to check the programmed contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To skip a chapter/ track:
To pause: To stop:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 .
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
22
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
Playing Repeatedly
Remote
ONLY
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP CHAP
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP TTL
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP GRP
REP OFF
(Canceled)
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP GRP
REP ALL
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP ALL
REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK * Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.
REP STEP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
A-B Repeat
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.
1
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
starts flashing on the display.
• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.
(at the same time)
2
Select the end point (B).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
stops flashing.
•
TV.
A-B appears on the
• You can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
(at the same time)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
Main Unit
ONLY
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
While the disc tray is closed...
(at the same time)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
23
OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
24
On-Screen Disc Operations
Remote control
ZOOM
, , ,
ON SCREEN
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
On-screen bars
DVD Video
1
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
DVD Audio
1
2 3
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4
2 3
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF
SVCD
1
SVCD
TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3
4
2 3
TITLE 14
/ 1/3
CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
VCD
1
VCD
2
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
3
4
CD
1 2 3
CD TITLE 14 CHAP
1/3
23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
10 keys
ENTER
CANCEL
7
REPEAT
¡
On-screen Bar Information
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
Mbps Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
TITLE 2 Current title
CHAP 3
GROUP 1
TRACK 14
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications
3 Operation modes
Indication Meanings
Playback
/
/ Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
OFF
CHAP.
TRACK
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1/3
1/3
1/3
PAGE 1 / 5
Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).
Select to change the page.
OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
Remote
ONLY
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
1
Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
14
1 / 1/3
23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 1/3
Goes off
2
Select (highlight) the item you want.
For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
ENTER
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
3
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER
TITLE 14
1
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
ENGLISH
4
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 1/3
23
2 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
FRENCH
5
Finish the setting.
ENTER
Pop-up window goes off.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
TIME
REM
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.
Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
OFF
25
OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
A-B
TITLE
TRACK *
OFF
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.
CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3
OFF
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.
2 Select .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
• last two digits in the examples above).
To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.
4 Select “A-B.”
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 / 1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
ENTER
DVD-VIDEO
A-
8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CH
1 / 1/3
6 Select the end point (B).
ENTER
A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
2 Select CHAP.
or TRACK .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
CHAP.
CHAPTER _
1 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
26
OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
PROGRESSIVE
0
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.
To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
Operations on t he CONTROL Screen
Remote
ONLY
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
1
2
3
4
Group : 2 / 3
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Winter sky.mp3
6
7
8
9
0
-
5
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
Track list
27
OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:42 AM
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:
Moves the bar to the track list.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP GRP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1
While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press
8
to display the still picture, then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
ENTER
Playback starts with the selected track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.
(at the same time)
For JPEG:
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ENTER
The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
DVD/CD
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press
8
.
To skip a track:
GROUP/TITLE
To stop playback:
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
28
AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM
Remote control
REV. MODE
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
7
SHIFT
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1
Insert a recordable cassette.
Push Insert Close
FM/AM
AUX
With the tape side facing outside
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Main unit
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
REC
PUSH OPEN 0
FM/AM
AUX
7
Tape direction indicator
To change the direction
Current source
3
(forward)
2
(reverse)
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(
(at the same time)
)
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM
3
Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
4
Start recording.
REC
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.
To stop recording:
On the main unit
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
1
Start playing a disc.
DVD/CD
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.
To record the entire disc
1
Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD
3
, then
7
.
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3
Start recording.
REC
The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.
2
While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...
REC
On the main unit
The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.
3
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
On the main unit
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD
3
, then
8
) before pressing REC.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.
30
Timer.fm Page 31 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM
Remote control
SET
,
Timer Operations
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
CANCEL
Setting the Timer
Remote
ONLY
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1
Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2
Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—
SET
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For Daily Timers:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.
31
Timer.fm Page 32 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:41 AM
5 Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
For Recording Timer:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
4
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
3
Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
Canceled Clock setting
(see page 17)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
1
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
CANCEL
RETURN
To turn on the Timer
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Remote control
, , ,
SHIFT
Setup Menu Icons
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
1 2 3 4
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Setup Menu Operations
10 keys
SET UP
ENTER
.
Operating Procedure
Remote
ONLY
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
2
Select one of the Setup Menus.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3
Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
6
Finish the setting.
ENTER
7
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
Setup Menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
SUBTITLE
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
To exit from the Setup Menu
SET UP
MENU
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.
(at the same time)
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
MONITOR TYPE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.
34
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).
Select one of the following:
AUTO:
FILM:
Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.
Select one of the following:
ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.
Select one of the following:
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.
DOLBY DIGITAL
/PCM:
To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND:
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
35
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.
ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.
OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
RESUME
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate Resume.
OFF: To cancel Resume.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
TV.
DVD2:
DVD3:
To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
TV.
To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
PARENTAL LOCK
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
36
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Restricting the Review
—Parental Lock
Remote
ONLY
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
5
Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
RU
RW
SA
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6
Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
(at the same time)
2
Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
7
Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
5
4
3
8
7
8
Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3
Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
SA
NONE
_ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.
9
Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
10
Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
To change the setting
1
Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
SA
4
_ _ _ _
PA R E N TA L L O C K
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD _ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
3
Change the settings.
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4
Enter your password again (after selecting
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.
SELECT
ENTER
USE 5∞ TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM.
1
Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
ENTER
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
38
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Additional Information
Learning More about This System
Getting Started
(see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.
Before Operating the System
(see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback
(see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Tape:
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
(see pages 18 to 20)
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Advanced Disc Operations
(see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
39
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
On-Screen Disc Operations
(see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.
Advanced Tape Operations
(see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.
and
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
)
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to
3
)
, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
Timer Operations
(see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Setup Menu Operations
(see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Hierarchy
Level 3 Level 4
01 03 04
02
1
2
3
4
5
6
05
7
8
Level 5
9
10
11
12
01
Group with its play order
1
Track with its play order
40
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.
]
There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
]
The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.
Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
]
The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.
]
The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
]
Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
]
Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
]
The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
]
The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.
]
Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
]
Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
]
]
The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
]
The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.
]
The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
]
The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).
You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
“NO AUDIO” appears.
]
This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
“LR ONLY” appears.
]
Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
]
The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc tray does not open or close.
]
The AC power cord is not plugged in.
]
Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
]
Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
]
The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
]
The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
]
Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Setup Menu Operations:
No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).
42
AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Language Code List
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
43
AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
Country/Area Codes List
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
√
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
AQ
AR
AS
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
AT
AU
Austria
Australia
AW Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
BG
BH
BI
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
BJ Benin
BM Bermuda
BN Brunei Darussalam
BO
BR
BS
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
BT
BV
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
BW Botswana
BY
BZ
CA
Belarus
Belize
Canada
CC
CF
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
CG Congo
CH Switzerland
CI Côte d’Ivoire
CK Cook Islands
CL Chile
CM Cameroon
CN China
CO Colombia
CR Costa Rica
CU Cuba
CV
CX
CY
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
CZ
DE
DJ
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
44
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
DK Denmark
DM Dominica
DO Dominican Republic
DZ
EC
EE
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
Ethiopia
Finland
FJ
FK
Fiji
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
FM Micronesia (Federated States of)
FO Faroe Islands
FR
FX
France
France, Metropolitan
GA Gabon
GB United Kingdom
GD Grenada
GE Georgia
GF French Guiana
GH Ghana
GI Gibraltar
GL Greenland
GM Gambia
GN Guinea
GP Guadeloupe
GQ Equatorial Guinea
GR Greece
GS
GT
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
GU Guam
GW Guinea-Bissau
GY Guyana
HK Hong Kong
HM Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
JM
HN Honduras
HR Croatia
HT Haiti
HU Hungary
ID Indonesia
IE Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
KE Kenya
KG Kyrgyzstan
KH Cambodia
KI Kiribati
KM Comoros
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis
KP Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
KR Korea, Republic of
KW Kuwait
KY Cayman Islands
KZ Kazakhstan
LA Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
LB
LC
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
LI Liechtenstein
LK Sri Lanka
LR Liberia
LS
LT
LU
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
LV
LY
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
MA Morocco
MC Monaco
MD Moldova, Republic of
MG Madagascar
MH Marshall Islands
ML Mali
MM Myanmar
MN Mongolia
MO Macau
MP Northern Mariana Islands
MQ Martinique
MR Mauritania
MS Montserrat
MT Malta
MU Mauritius
MV Maldives
MW Malawi
MX Mexico
MY Malaysia
MZ Mozambique
NA Namibia
NC New Caledonia
NE Niger
NF Norfolk Island
NG Nigeria
NI Nicaragua
NL Netherlands
NO Norway
AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:40 AM
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
NP Nepal
NR Nauru
NU Niue
NZ New Zealand
OM Oman
PA Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon
PN Pitcairn
PR Puerto Rico
PT Portugal
PW Palau
PY Paraguay
QA Qatar
RE Réunion
RO Romania
RU Russian Federation
RW Rwanda
SA Saudi Arabia
SB
SC
SD
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
SE
SG
SH
SI
SJ
SK
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
SL Sierra Leone
SM San Marino
SN Senegal
SO
SR
ST
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
TG
TH
TJ
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
TK Tokelau
TM Turkmenistan
TN Tunisia
TO
TP
TR
Tonga
East Timor
Turkey
TT
TV
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
TW Taiwan
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of
UA Ukraine
UG Uganda
UM United States Minor Outlying
Islands
US United States
UY Uruguay
UZ Uzbekistan
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)
VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
VE Venezuela
VG Virgin Islands (British)
VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)
VN Vietnam
VU Vanuatu
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands
WS Samoa
YE Yemen
YT Mayotte
YU Yugoslavia
ZA South Africa
ZM Zambia
ZR Zaire
ZW Zimbabwe
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Playback disc
DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
MP3/WMA disc
STREAM/PCM
DTS bitstream
Output Signals
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 10:39 AM
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Audio Input
Digital output:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4
AUX:
Ω
(10% THD)
400 mV/50 k
Ω
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(P
B
/P
R
)
Speakers/Impedance:
NTSC/PAL selectable
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75
4
Ω
– 16
Ω
Ω
Tuner section
FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
Tape section
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range: 90 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
1.8 kg each
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
General
Power requirement:AC 110 V/AC 127 V/AC 220 V/
AC 230 V – AC 240 V (adjustable with the voltage selector), 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption: 65 W (at operation)
Dimensions (approx.):
4.1 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
Mass (approx.):
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Remote control
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
10, 13, 22, 28
9, 17
14
11, 16–20,
23
Main unit
8
Remote sensor
10, 11
10–13,
22, 28
30
11, 13
20
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7
10
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
SET
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN CANCEL
RETURN
DVD/CD TAPE
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +
DISPLAY
3D
PHONIC
BASS/
TREBLE RHYTHM AX
DIMMER
FADE
MUTING
VOLUME
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
STANDBY/ON
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX
REC DOWN UP
VOLUME
PHONES
10
17
17, 31
14, 20,
25–31, 33
11, 13,
20–23, 28
15
15
10, 15
16
15
12
14
15
10, 15
13, 23
10
46
Cover[UX].fm Page 2 Tuesday, June 1, 2004 11:00 AM
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A., Canada,
Australia, and U.K.)
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
Y
P
B
S-VIDEO
PUSH OPEN
E
RS
VE
RE
TO
AU
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN, AR, PE
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
0604AIMMDWJEM
UX-P450UB.book Page 1 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM
®
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
微型組合音響
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
—
由
CA-UXP450
及
SP-UXP450
組成
中
文
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
使用說明書
GVT0129-013A
[UB]
UX-P450UB.book Page 1 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM
Warnings, Cautions and Others/ 警告,注意及其他須知事項
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely
(all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect the mains line.
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights
• in red.
When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.
The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
注意 — STANDBY/ON
無論 STANDBY/ON
開關 !
開關在任何位置,電源線的電源還是
沒 有被切 斷,若要將 電源完 全關閉,應 把電 源插頭 拔离插 座
(所有的燈和信息均熄滅)。
• 當主機正處于備用狀態, STANDBY/ON 燈為紅色。
• 當主機開啟后, STANDBY/ON 燈為綠色。
電源開關可用遙控器控制。
注意
為了減少触電,火災等危險:
1.
切勿擅自卸下螺絲釘,蓋子或機殼。
2.
切勿讓本機受雨淋或置潮濕環境中。
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
• newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.
•
•
When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
注意
• 切勿堵塞通風口或通風孔。
( 如果通風口或通風孔被報紙或布等堵塞,熱量將無法散
出。)
• 切勿在本設備上放置任何裸露的火源,如點燃的蜡燭。
• 處理廢棄電池時,必須考慮環境問題 ,并嚴格遵守當地關
于處理廢棄電池的有關法律或規定。
• 切勿將本裝置暴露于雨水所及,潮濕 ,滴水或濺起水花的
地方,亦不要將任何裝滿液体的物件 ( 如花瓶 ) 放置在本
裝置上。
鐳射產品的重要說明
1.
一級鐳射產品。
2.
注意: 切勿打開頂蓋板。本机內部沒有用戶可自行維修的部
件;所有維修工作應由有資格的人員完成。
3.
注意: 當內部鎖定裝置失效或者損坏后,打開蓋板可能會產
生可見或不可見的鐳射輻射。應避免受到鐳射光束的直接照
射。
4.
標簽的復制標示:注意標簽位于機內。
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of
10 cm or more.
15 cm
15
1 cm
1
15 cm
15
1 cm
1
15 cm
15
注意 : 正确通風
為免發生触電和火警的危險,及防止本機受損,請將本機如下
放置:
1.
前面:沒有障礙物及地方開闊。
2.
側面 / 頂面 / 背面:在圖中所示范圍中,不應放置任何障礙
物。
3.
底部:放置在水平面上。放置在一個高 10 厘米或以上的臺
上,以保証足夠的通風道。
15 cm
15
15 cm
15
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450
10 cm
10
CA-UXP450
G-1
UX-P450UBTOC.fm Page 1 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:27 PM
Contents
Introduction ..................................................... 2
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27
Getting Started................................................. 3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29
Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29
Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30
Before Operating the System.......................... 7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Timer Operations .......................................... 31
Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31
Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33
Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ................................................... 15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level ............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................ 39
Maintenance .................................................................. 41
Troubleshooting............................................................. 42
Language Code List....................................................... 43
Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45
Specifications ................................................................ 46
Parts Index ..................................................................... 46
Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18
Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback .................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Introduction.fm Page 2 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
2
Introduction
Precautions
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.
If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button briefly .
Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.
2 sec.
Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).
• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).
DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.
Remote
ONLY
Main Unit
ONLY
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.
Introduction.fm Page 3 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
Getting Started
Step 1
:Unpack the package and check the accessories.
Step
1
: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2))
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step
2
: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2
: Prepare the remote control.
2
Step 3
: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Finally plug the AC power cord.
Now you can operate the System.
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.
3
Connection.fm Page 4 Tuesday, May 25, 2004 12:36 PM
Step
3
: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
Before connecting optical digital cord
Remove the protective cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Outdoor FM antenna
(not supplied)
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
TV
DECODER
AUX
VCR, etc.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Y
P
B
P
R
AV
COMPU LINK
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
AUDIO OUT
LEFT
RIGHT
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75
Ω
wire with coaxial type connector.
Yellow
Composite video cord (supplied)
OR
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
Green
Blue
Red
Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
White
Red
Audio cord (not supplied)
4
Connection.fm Page 5 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.
VIDEO
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
Y
P
B
S-VIDEO
P
R
PUSH OPEN
REVERSE
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Connection.fm Page 6 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
To connect the AM loop antenna
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.
Changing the Scanning Mode
Remote
ONLY
This System supports progressive scanning.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
0
PROGRE
INTER
PROGRE
INTER
(at the same time)
Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Connection.fm Page 7 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
Before Operating the System
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
Disc Type Mark (Logo)
Video
Format
Region
Code*
Number
DVD Video
3 or
ALL
DVD Audio
Video CD
(VCD)
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
SUPER VIDEO
NTSC or
PAL
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio formats.
• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.
• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.
• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.
• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“3.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0
+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
7
Connection.fm Page 8 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
9 p q w e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
2 Daily Timer indicators
• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.
3 SLEEP indicator
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3
(tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
•
–
(reverse mode):
: tape play continues endlessly.
–
–
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9 Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
• (repeat)/ALL:
– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.
8
Connection.fm Page 9 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:28 PM
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
• DVD Video:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:
Total title no.
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD: • Audio CD:
Total group no.
Group no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
• SVCD/VCD:
Total playing time
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time *
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
Total track no.
Total playing time *
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG: • JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current group no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
Current file no.
9
Basic.fm Page 10 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
10 keys
ENTER
TOP MENU
2
8
GROUP/TITLE
4 / ¢
SHIFT
1
2
DVD/CD
3
4
VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
Daily Operations
—Playback
1
SET
MENU
, , ,
RETURN
7
1 / ¡
3D PHONIC
3
In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.
1
Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.
2
Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.
3
Adjust the volume.
4
Operate the target source as explained later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.
10
Basic.fm Page 11 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Listening to the Radio
Main Unit
ONLY
To set the AM tuner interval spacing
Before operating the tuner, it is required to select the appropriate AM space interval used for your area.
1 Select the AM band.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Remote control: Main unit:
2 sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
2 sec.
UP
FM AM
2 Turn off the power.
STANDBY/ON
3 Select the appropriate AM space interval for your area.
• You can only use the button and the control on the front panel.
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
9
DOWN
While holding...
UP
While holding...
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY/ON
AM 9KHZ
(9 kHz interval)
AM 10KHZ
(10 kHz interval)
(at the same time)
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
1
2
Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.
Activate the preset number entry mode.
SET
• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM AM
11
Basic.fm Page 12 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
3 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Examples:
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
• You can also use the ¡ or 1 buttons.
4
Store the station.
SET
To start: To stop:
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM
Remote
ONLY
AM
To change the tape running direction
3
(forward play)
2
(reverse play)
To reverse the tape automatically
REV. MODE
7
2 Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
• You can also use the
¡
or
1
buttons.
10 10
Playing Back a Tape
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push Insert Close
With the tape side facing outside
(at the same time)
Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.
Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Disc
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.
If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.
12
Basic.fm Page 13 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes
“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
On-screen guide icons
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:
At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.
At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.
, , , , ,
To close the disc tray, press
0
again.
• If you press DVD/CD
3
, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).
To start: To pause: To stop:
DVD/CD
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
GROUP/TITLE
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD
3
(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press
7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
• First time you press
4
, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
SLOW – SLOW
+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x2 x5 x10 x20
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
x60
13
Basic.fm Page 14 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Remote
ONLY
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
7
For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:
GROUP/TITLE
Moves to the next page.
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
PHONIC
3D PHONIC ACTION
3D PHONIC OFF
(Canceled)
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
DRAMA
THEATER
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.
DRAMA Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
To play back using the disc menu
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
Remote
ONLY
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
Moves to the previous page.
To return to the previous menu:
CANCEL
RETURN
(at the same time)
To cancel PBC
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Select a track.
Stop playback.
Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press
7
(twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD
3
.
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.
14
Basic.fm Page 15 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Daily Operations
—Sound & Other Adjustments
Remote control
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control: Main unit:
VOLUME DVD LEVEL
CLOCK/
TIMER
ENTER
VFP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SET
, , ,
VOLUME
FADE
MUTING
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.
BASS/TREBLE
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME
+/–
FADE
MUTING
Adjusting the Sound
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Basic.fm Page 16 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
Remote
ONLY
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.
DVD LEVEL
5
NORMAL MIDDLE
HIGH
(at the same time)
NORMAL Original recording level.
MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
HIGH Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
VFP
GAMMA
BRIGHTNESS
6
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
(at the same time) On the TV
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
Remote
ONLY
DIMMER
DIM1
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
DIM2
AUTO DIM
DIM1
DIM2
Dims the display.
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when playback stops.
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
ENTER
GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Basic.fm Page 17 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:29 PM
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
Turning Off the Power
Automatically
Remote
ONLY
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
On
Canceled
Setting the Clock
Remote
ONLY
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.
2
Adjust the hour.
SET
(at the same time)
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
10 20 30 60 90 120
Canceled
150
3 Adjust the minute.
SET
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SLEEP
Now the built-in clock starts working.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.
17
UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
Remote control
SUB TITLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
, , ,
DVD/CD
3
8
SHIFT
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
ANGLE
10 keys
Selecting the View Angle
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
ANGLE
3
ENTER
7
SLOW –/+
Ex.:
1/3
1
1/3
1
(at the same time)
2/3
2
2/3
2
3/3
3
3/3
3
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1
Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
SUB TITLE
2
1/3
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
18
UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
2
Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
3/3
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3 2/3
1 2
3/3
3
While playing an SVCD video...
SUB TITLE
2
–/4
OFF
(at the same time)
1/4
1
4/4
4
3/4
3
AUDIO
1
(at the same time)
2/4
2
Selecting the Audio Track
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
AUDIO
1
SVCD
ST1
R2
VCD
ST
ST2
L2
L
(at the same time)
L1
R1
R
ST1/ST2
ST
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Remote
ONLY
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
1
Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.
19
UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
2
Enter the key number.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.
To cancel the key number entry, press
7
.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
Remote
ONLY
To start still picture playback:
While playing...
To resume normal playback:
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
1
2
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
Advance the still picture frame by frame.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
Slow-motion playback
1
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
2
Select slow motion speed.
SLOW – SLOW +
Forward slow motion starts.
Reverse slow motion* starts.
SLOW
+
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
SLOW –
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).
Zoom
1
Remote
ONLY
While playing back...
ZOOM
4
(at the same time)
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
Remote control
10 keys
,
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
Main unit
DVD/CD
3
4 , 7 , ¢
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Program Play
Remote
ONLY
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1
Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
ENTER
CANCEL
7
PLAY
MODE
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PRGM
On the display
PROGRAM
No
1
8
9
6
7
10
2
3
4
5
Group/Title Track/Chapter
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2
Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
1 Select a title or group number.
2
3
Select a chapter or track number.
Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
0
21
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
3
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
Playing at Random—Random Play
Remote
ONLY
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1
Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To skip a step:
GROUP/TITLE
To pause:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
To stop:
RANDOM
2
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.
In the programmed order.
• You can also use
4
or
¢
to check the programmed contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To skip a chapter/ track:
To pause: To stop:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 .
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
22
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:30 PM
Playing Repeatedly
Remote
ONLY
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP CHAP
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP TTL
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP GRP
REP OFF
(Canceled)
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP GRP
REP ALL
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP ALL
REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK * Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.
REP STEP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
A-B Repeat
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.
1
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
starts flashing on the display.
• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.
(at the same time)
2
Select the end point (B).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
stops flashing.
•
TV.
A-B appears on the
• You can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
(at the same time)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
Main Unit
ONLY
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
While the disc tray is closed...
(at the same time)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
23
OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
24
On-Screen Disc Operations
Remote control
ZOOM
, , ,
ON SCREEN
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
On-screen bars
DVD Video
1
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
DVD Audio
1
2 3
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4
2 3
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF
SVCD
1
SVCD
TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3
4
2 3
TITLE 14
/ 1/3
CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
VCD
1
VCD
2
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
3
4
CD
1 2 3
CD TITLE 14 CHAP
1/3
23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
10 keys
ENTER
CANCEL
7
REPEAT
¡
On-screen Bar Information
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
Mbps Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
TITLE 2 Current title
CHAP 3
GROUP 1
TRACK 14
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications
3 Operation modes
Indication Meanings
Playback
/
/ Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
OFF
CHAP.
TRACK
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1/3
1/3
1/3
PAGE 1 / 5
Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).
Select to change the page.
OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
Remote
ONLY
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
1
Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
14
1 / 1/3
23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 1/3
Goes off
2
Select (highlight) the item you want.
For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
ENTER
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
3
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER
TITLE 14
1
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
ENGLISH
4
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 1/3
23
2 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
FRENCH
5
Finish the setting.
ENTER
Pop-up window goes off.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
TIME
REM
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.
Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
OFF
25
OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
A-B
TITLE
TRACK *
OFF
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.
CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3
OFF
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.
2 Select .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
• last two digits in the examples above).
To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.
4 Select “A-B.”
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 / 1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
ENTER
DVD-VIDEO
A-
8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CH
1 / 1/3
6 Select the end point (B).
ENTER
A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
2 Select CHAP.
or TRACK .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
CHAP.
CHAPTER _
1 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
26
OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
PROGRESSIVE
0
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.
To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
Operations on t he CONTROL Screen
Remote
ONLY
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
1
2
3
4
Group : 2 / 3
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Winter sky.mp3
6
7
8
9
0
-
5
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
Track list
27
OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:
Moves the bar to the track list.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP GRP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1
While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press
8
to display the still picture, then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
ENTER
Playback starts with the selected track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.
(at the same time)
For JPEG:
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ENTER
The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
DVD/CD
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press
8
.
To skip a track:
GROUP/TITLE
To stop playback:
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
28
AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
Remote control
REV. MODE
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
7
SHIFT
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1
Insert a recordable cassette.
Push Insert Close
FM/AM
AUX
With the tape side facing outside
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Main unit
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
REC
PUSH OPEN 0
FM/AM
AUX
7
Tape direction indicator
To change the direction
Current source
3
(forward)
2
(reverse)
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(
(at the same time)
)
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:31 PM
3
Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
4
Start recording.
REC
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.
To stop recording:
On the main unit
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
1
Start playing a disc.
DVD/CD
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.
To record the entire disc
1
Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD
3
, then
7
.
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3
Start recording.
REC
The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.
2
While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...
REC
On the main unit
The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.
3
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
On the main unit
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD
3
, then
8
) before pressing REC.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.
30
Timer.fm Page 31 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
Remote control
SET
,
Timer Operations
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
CANCEL
Setting the Timer
Remote
ONLY
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1
Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2
Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—
SET
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For Daily Timers:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.
31
Timer.fm Page 32 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
5 Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
For Recording Timer:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
4
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
3
Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
Canceled Clock setting
(see page 17)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
1
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
CANCEL
RETURN
To turn on the Timer
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
Remote control
, , ,
SHIFT
Setup Menu Icons
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
1 2 3 4
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Setup Menu Operations
10 keys
SET UP
ENTER
.
Operating Procedure
Remote
ONLY
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
2
Select one of the Setup Menus.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3
Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
6
Finish the setting.
ENTER
7
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
Setup Menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
SUBTITLE
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, SPANISH and CHINESE.
To exit from the Setup Menu
SET UP
MENU
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.
(at the same time)
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
MONITOR TYPE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.
34
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).
Select one of the following:
AUTO:
FILM:
Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.
Select one of the following:
ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.
Select one of the following:
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.
DOLBY DIGITAL
/PCM:
To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND:
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
35
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.
ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.
OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
RESUME
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate Resume.
OFF: To cancel Resume.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
TV.
DVD2:
DVD3:
To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
TV.
To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
PARENTAL LOCK
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
36
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
Restricting the Review
—Parental Lock
Remote
ONLY
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
5
Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
GW
GY
HK
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6
Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
(at the same time)
2
Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
7
Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
5
4
3
8
7
8
Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3
Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
HK
NONE
_ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.
9
Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
10
Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:32 PM
To change the setting
1
Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
HK
4
_ _ _ _
PA R E N TA L L O C K
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD _ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
3
Change the settings.
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4
Enter your password again (after selecting
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
1
Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
ENTER
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
38
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
Additional Information
Learning More about This System
Getting Started
(see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.
Before Operating the System
(see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback
(see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Tape:
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
(see pages 18 to 20)
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Advanced Disc Operations
(see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
39
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
On-Screen Disc Operations
(see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.
Advanced Tape Operations
(see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.
and
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
)
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to
3
)
, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
Timer Operations
(see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Setup Menu Operations
(see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Hierarchy
Level 3 Level 4
01 03 04
02
1
2
3
4
5
6
05
7
8
Level 5
9
10
11
12
01
Group with its play order
1
Track with its play order
40
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.
]
There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
]
The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.
Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
]
The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.
]
The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
]
Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
]
Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
]
The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
]
The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.
]
Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
]
Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
]
]
The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
]
The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.
]
The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
]
The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).
You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
“NO AUDIO” appears.
]
This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
“LR ONLY” appears.
]
Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
]
The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc tray does not open or close.
]
The AC power cord is not plugged in.
]
Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
]
Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
]
The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
]
The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
]
Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Setup Menu Operations:
No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).
42
AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
Language Code List
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
43
AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
Country/Area Codes List
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
√
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
AQ
AR
AS
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
AT
AU
Austria
Australia
AW Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
BG
BH
BI
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
BJ Benin
BM Bermuda
BN Brunei Darussalam
BO
BR
BS
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
BT
BV
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
BW Botswana
BY
BZ
CA
Belarus
Belize
Canada
CC
CF
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
CG Congo
CH Switzerland
CI Côte d’Ivoire
CK Cook Islands
CL Chile
CM Cameroon
CN China
CO Colombia
CR Costa Rica
CU Cuba
CV
CX
CY
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
CZ
DE
DJ
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
44
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
DK Denmark
DM Dominica
DO Dominican Republic
DZ
EC
EE
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
Ethiopia
Finland
FJ
FK
Fiji
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
FM Micronesia (Federated States of)
FO Faroe Islands
FR
FX
France
France, Metropolitan
GA Gabon
GB United Kingdom
GD Grenada
GE Georgia
GF French Guiana
GH Ghana
GI Gibraltar
GL Greenland
GM Gambia
GN Guinea
GP Guadeloupe
GQ Equatorial Guinea
GR Greece
GS
GT
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
GU Guam
GW Guinea-Bissau
GY Guyana
HK Hong Kong
HM Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
JM
HN Honduras
HR Croatia
HT Haiti
HU Hungary
ID Indonesia
IE Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
KE Kenya
KG Kyrgyzstan
KH Cambodia
KI Kiribati
KM Comoros
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis
KP Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
KR Korea, Republic of
KW Kuwait
KY Cayman Islands
KZ Kazakhstan
LA Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
LB
LC
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
LI Liechtenstein
LK Sri Lanka
LR Liberia
LS
LT
LU
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
LV
LY
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
MA Morocco
MC Monaco
MD Moldova, Republic of
MG Madagascar
MH Marshall Islands
ML Mali
MM Myanmar
MN Mongolia
MO Macau
MP Northern Mariana Islands
MQ Martinique
MR Mauritania
MS Montserrat
MT Malta
MU Mauritius
MV Maldives
MW Malawi
MX Mexico
MY Malaysia
MZ Mozambique
NA Namibia
NC New Caledonia
NE Niger
NF Norfolk Island
NG Nigeria
NI Nicaragua
NL Netherlands
NO Norway
AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Monday, May 24, 2004 4:33 PM
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
NP Nepal
NR Nauru
NU Niue
NZ New Zealand
OM Oman
PA Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon
PN Pitcairn
PR Puerto Rico
PT Portugal
PW Palau
PY Paraguay
QA Qatar
RE Réunion
RO Romania
RU Russian Federation
RW Rwanda
SA Saudi Arabia
SB
SC
SD
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
SE
SG
SH
SI
SJ
SK
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
SL Sierra Leone
SM San Marino
SN Senegal
SO
SR
ST
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
TG
TH
TJ
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
TK Tokelau
TM Turkmenistan
TN Tunisia
TO
TP
TR
Tonga
East Timor
Turkey
TT
TV
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
TW Taiwan
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of
UA Ukraine
UG Uganda
UM United States Minor Outlying
Islands
US United States
UY Uruguay
UZ Uzbekistan
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)
VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
VE Venezuela
VG Virgin Islands (British)
VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)
VN Vietnam
VU Vanuatu
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands
WS Samoa
YE Yemen
YT Mayotte
YU Yugoslavia
ZA South Africa
ZM Zambia
ZR Zaire
ZW Zimbabwe
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Playback disc
DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
MP3/WMA disc
STREAM/PCM
DTS bitstream
Output Signals
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Friday, May 28, 2004 1:29 PM
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Audio Input
Digital output:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4
AUX:
Ω
(10% THD)
400 mV/50 k
Ω
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(P
B
/P
R
)
Speakers/Impedance:
NTSC/PAL selectable
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75
4
Ω
– 16
Ω
Ω
Tuner section
FM tuning range: 87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz intervals)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz intervals)
Tape section
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range: 90 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1
4 Ω
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
1.8 kg each
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
General
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
AC 220 V , 50 Hz/60 Hz
65 W (at operation)
1.3 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Remote control
11, 12, 14,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
10, 13, 22, 28
9, 17
14
11, 16–20,
23
Main unit
8
Remote sensor
10, 11
10–13,
22, 28
30
11, 13
20
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7
10
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
SET
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN CANCEL
RETURN
DVD/CD TAPE
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +
DISPLAY
3D
PHONIC
BASS/
TREBLE RHYTHM AX
DIMMER
FADE
MUTING
VOLUME
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
STANDBY/ON
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX
REC DOWN UP
VOLUME
10
17
17, 31
14, 20,
25–31, 33
11, 13,
20–23, 28
15
15
10, 15
16
15
12
14
15
10, 11,
15
13, 23
10
PHONES
46
UX-P450UB.book Page 2 Thursday, May 27, 2004 8:19 PM
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN, CS
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED 0504AIMMDWJEM
Cover[A].fm Page 1 Friday, June 11, 2004 3:49 PM
®
MICRO COMPONENT SYSTEM
UX-P450
—Consists of CA-UXP450 and SP-UXP450
SUPER VIDEO
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0129-014B
[A]
Safty[A].fm Page 1 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:04 PM
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely (all lamps and indications go off). The STANDBY/ON any position does not disconnect the mains line.
button in
• When the unit is on standby, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in red.
• When the unit is turned on, the STANDBY/ON lamp lights in green.
The power can be remote controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2.
CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3.
CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED
INSIDE THE UNIT.
15 cm
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front: No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/ Top/ Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom: Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
1 cm
15 cm
1 cm 15 cm
15 cm
15 cm
SP-UXP450 CA-UXP450 SP-UXP450
10 cm
CA-UXP450
G-1
UX-P450ATOC.fm Page 1 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:04 PM
Contents
Introduction ..................................................... 2
Precautions ......................................................................2
How to Read This Manual...............................................2
On-Screen Disc Operations .......................... 24
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 24
Operations Using the On-screen Bar ............................. 25
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures................................. 27
Operations on the CONTROL Screen ........................... 27
Getting Started................................................. 3
Step 1: Unpack ................................................................3
Step 2: Prepare the Remote Control ................................3
Step 3: Hook Up ..............................................................4
Setting the Video Output Selector ...................................6
Changing the Scanning Mode .........................................6
Advanced Tape Operations .......................... 29
Recording on a Tape...................................................... 29
Synchronized Disc Recording ....................................... 30
Before Operating the System.......................... 7
Playable Disc Types ........................................................7
Display Indicators............................................................8
Timer Operations .......................................... 31
Setting the Timer ........................................................... 31
Setup Menu Operations ................................ 33
Operating Procedure ...................................................... 33
Restricting the Review—Parental Lock ........................ 37
Daily Operations—Playback ........................ 10
Listening to the Radio ...................................................11
Playing Back a Tape ......................................................12
Playing Back a Disc.......................................................12
Daily Operations—Sound & Other
Adjustments ................................................... 15
Adjusting the Volume....................................................15
Adjusting the Sound ......................................................15
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level ............................................................16
Changing the Display Brightness ..................................16
Changing the Picture Tone ............................................16
Setting the Clock ...........................................................17
Turning Off the Power Automatically...........................17
Additional Information................................. 39
Learning More about This System ................................ 39
Maintenance .................................................................. 41
Troubleshooting............................................................. 42
Language Code List....................................................... 43
Country/Area Codes List............................................... 44
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals ..................... 45
Specifications ................................................................ 46
Parts Index ..................................................................... 46
Unique DVD/VCD Operations ..................... 18
Selecting the View Angle ..............................................18
Selecting the Subtitle Language ....................................18
Selecting the Audio Track .............................................19
Playing Back a Bonus Group ........................................19
Special Effect Playback .................................................20
Advanced Disc Operations............................ 21
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play..........21
Playing at Random—Random Play...............................22
Playing Repeatedly ........................................................23
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock ........................23
1
Introduction.fm Page 2 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:03 PM
2
Introduction
Precautions
Installation
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent internal heat buildup inside the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
How to Read This Manual
To make this manual as simple and easy-to-understand as possible, we have adapted the following methods:
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the table below.
• Some related tips and notes are explained later in the sections “Additional Information” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section explaining the operations.
If you want to know more about the functions, or if you have a doubt about the functions, go to these sections and you will find the answers.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Indicates that you press the button briefly .
Indicates that you press the button briefly and repeatedly until an option you want is selected.
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm place
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case, leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before operating any further.
2 sec.
Indicates that you press and hold the button for specified seconds.
• The number inside the arrow indicates the period of press (in this example, 2 seconds).
• If no number is inside the arrow, press and hold until the entire procedure is complete or until you get a result you want.
Indicates that you turn the control toward the specified direction(s).
DO NOT disassemble the System since there are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer.
Remote
ONLY
Main Unit
ONLY
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the remote control.
Indicates that this operation is only possible using the buttons and controls on the main unit.
Introduction.fm Page 3 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:03 PM
Getting Started
Step 1
:Unpack the package and check the accessories.
Step
1
: Unpack
After unpacking, check to be sure that you have all the following items. The number in parentheses indicates the quantity of each piece supplied.
• FM antenna (1)
• AM loop antenna (1)
• Composite video cord (1)
• Remote control (1)
• Batteries (2)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
Step
2
: Prepare the Remote Control
Insert the batteries into the remote control by matching the polarity (+ and –) correctly.
1
Step 2
: Prepare the remote control.
2
Step 3
: Hook up the components such as AM/FM antennas, speakers, etc. (see pages 4 to 6).
3
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Finally plug the AC power cord.
Now you can operate the System.
• DO NOT use an old battery together with a new one.
• DO NOT use different types of batteries together.
• DO NOT expose batteries to heat or flame.
• DO NOT leave the batteries in the battery compartment when you are not going to use the remote control for an extended period of time. Otherwise, the remote control will be damaged from battery leakage.
3
Connection.fm Page 4 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
Step
3
: Hook Up
If you need more detailed information, see page 6.
Illustrations of the input/output terminals below are typical examples.
When you connect other components, refer also to their manuals since the terminal names actually printed on the rear may vary.
Turn the power off to all components before connections.
For better FM/AM reception
AM loop antenna
Keep it connected.
Outdoor FM antenna
(not supplied)
Before connecting optical digital cord
Remove the protective cap from the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUT terminal.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
TV
DECODER
AUX
VCR, etc.
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
Y
P
B
P
R
AV
COMPU LINK
Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an outdoor FM antenna using a 75
Ω
wire with coaxial type connector.
Yellow
OR
Composite video cord (supplied)
S-video cord (not supplied)
OR
Green
Blue
Red Component video cord (not supplied)
AV COMPU LINK cord (not supplied)
(cord with monaural mini plug)
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
OPTICAL
DIGITAL IN
Optical digital cord (not supplied)
AUDIO OUT
LEFT
RIGHT
White
Red Audio cord (not supplied)
4
Connection.fm Page 5 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is obtained.
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best reception.
VIDEO
SELECT
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
PAL
NTSC
Y
P
B
S-VIDEO
OP
REVERSE
To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all connections and selector settings on the rear are complete.
5
Connection.fm Page 6 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
To connect the AM loop antenna
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
IMPORTANT
The speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing the speakers.
• When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.
• If the AM loop antenna wire or speaker cords are covered with vinyl, remove the vinyl to expose the tip of the antenna by twisting the vinyl.
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the antennas away from metallic parts of the System, connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause poor reception.
To connect the speaker cords
Connect the right speaker to the RIGHT terminals, and the left speaker to the LEFT terminals.
AV COMPU LINK remote control system
This system allows you to use JVC’s TV with simple operations; by starting playing back a disc, the TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
• To use AV COMPU LINK, you need to connect the
System and the TV by using a cord with monaural miniplugs (not supplied) in addition to the video input/output connection through the COMPONENT jacks, S-VIDEO jack or VIDEO (composite) jack on the rear.
1 Hold
2 Insert
3 Release
• When connecting the speaker cords, match the polarity of the speaker terminals: Red cord to (+) and black cord to (–).
Setting the Video Output Selector
You can select the video output to match it to the color system of your TV.
NTSC: For an NTSC TV.
PAL: For a PAL TV.
VIDEO
OUT
SELECT
PAL
NTSC
• When using a multi-color system
TV, either position will work.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to each terminal.
• DO NOT allow the conductor of the speaker cords to be in touch with the metallic parts of the System.
Changing the Scanning Mode
Remote
ONLY
This System supports progressive scanning.
If you connect a progressive TV through the COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture from the built-in
DVD player by selecting “PROGRE.”
PROGRESSIVE
0
PROGRE
INTER
PROGRE
INTER
(at the same time)
Progressive scanning. For a progressive TV.
Interlaced scanning. For a conventional TV.
6
Connection.fm Page 7 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
Before Operating the System
Playable Disc Types
This unit has been designed to play back the following discs:
Disc Type Mark (Logo)
Video
Format
Region
Code*
Number
DVD Video
4 or
ALL
DVD Audio
Video CD
(VCD)
Super Video
CD (SVCD)
DIGITAL VIDEO
SUPER VIDEO
NTSC or
PAL
DVD Video—digital audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio formats.
• Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same format used for CDs and most studio masters.
• Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel encode to create the realistic surround sound.
• DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVD, the System properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2 channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the speakers.
• To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier with a proper built-in decoder to the digital output terminal on the rear.
Audio CD
CD-R
CD-RW
DVD-R
DVD-RW
COMPACT
DIGITAL AUDIO
The System can play back CD-R or CD-RW recorded in the Audio CD, Video CD, SVCD,
MP3, WMA, and JPEG formats.
The System can play back DVD-R or DVD-
RW recorded in the video format.
In addition to the above discs, this System can play back audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I
Ready), CD-ROM, Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
* Note on Region Code
DVD players and DVDs have their own Region Code numbers.
This System can play back only DVDs recorded with the NTSC or PAL color system whose Region Code numbers including
“4.”
EX.:
If a DVD with the improper Region Code numbers is loaded,
“RGN ERR (Region Code Error)” appears on the display and playback will not start.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS2.0
+DIGITAL OUT ” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by
Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by
Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE
SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED
THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO
THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE
ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND
625p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR
CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.
7
Connection.fm Page 8 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
Display Indicators
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while you are operating the System.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how the indicator illuminates on the display.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8
SLEEP MONO ST MP3 WMA 3DPHONIC REC
123 REC
RANDOM
PRGM ALL BONUS B.S.P.
A.STANDBY
9 p q w e
1 Rhythm Ax indicator
• Lights when Rhythm Ax is activated.
2 Daily Timer indicators
• : lights when Daily Timer stands by or is being preset.
• 1/2/3: lights when a Daily Timer (1, 2, or 3) stands by; flashes while setting or working.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes while setting or working.
3 SLEEP indicator
• Lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
4 FM reception indicators
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in monaural.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
5 MP3/WMA indicators
• MP3: lights when an MP3 track is detected.
• WMA: lights when a WMA track is detected.
6 3D PHONIC indicator
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated.
7 REC indicator
• Lights while recording.
8 Tape operation indicators
•
2 3
(tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
•
–
(reverse mode):
: tape play continues endlessly.
–
–
: tape automatically reverses once.
: tape play stops at the end of one side.
9 Disc operation indicators
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• PRGM (program): lights when Program Play is activated.
• (repeat)/ALL:
– ALL : lights when Disc Repeat is activated.
– : lights when any Repeat other than the above is activated.
p BONUS indicator
• Lights when a DVD Audio with a bonus group is detected.
q B.S.P. (Browsable Still Picture) indicator
• Lights when Browsable Still Pictures are detected while playing a DVD Audio.
w Main display
• While listening to radio: Band (or preset number) and station frequency appear.
• While selecting “AUX”: “AUX” appears.
• While playing a tape: “TAPE” appears.
• While playing a disc: See “Indications on the main display while operating a disc” on page 9.
e A(auto). STANDBY indicator
• Lights when Auto Standby is activated.
• Flashes when disc playback stops with Auto Standby activated.
8
Connection.fm Page 9 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:02 PM
Indications on the main display while operating a disc
While playing back a disc:
• DVD Video:
While disc play is stopped:
• DVD Video:
Current chapter no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current title and chapter numbers for a few seconds.
• DVD Audio: • DVD Audio:
Total title no.
Track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• Audio CD: • Audio CD:
Total group no.
Group no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• SVCD/VCD:
Total track no.
• SVCD/VCD:
Total playing time
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time *
* “PBC” appears while playing a disc with PBC.
• MP3/WMA:
Total track no.
Total playing time *
* Changes to “PBC” when stopping PBC playback.
• MP3/WMA:
Current track no.
Current track no.
Elapsed playing time
• By pressing DISPLAY, you can show the current group and track numbers for a few seconds.
• JPEG: • JPEG:
Current group no.
Current group no.
Current file no.
Current group no.
• If Resume is turned “ON” (see page 36), “RESUME” appears when you stop playback.
Current file no.
9
Basic.fm Page 10 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
10 keys
ENTER
TOP MENU
2
8
GROUP/TITLE
4 / ¢
SHIFT
1
2
DVD/CD
3
4
VOLUME
STANDBY/ON
Daily Operations
—Playback
1
SET
MENU
, , ,
RETURN
7
1 / ¡
3D PHONIC
3
In this manual, the operation using the remote control is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or similar) name and marks.
1
Turn on the power.
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in green.
• Without pressing STANDBY/ON , the System turns on by pressing one of the source selecting buttons in the next step.
2
Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is ready to start.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external component.
3
Adjust the volume.
4
Operate the target source as explained later.
To turn off (stand by) the unit
STANDBY/ON
The STANDBY/ON lamp on the main unit lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always consumed even while on standby.
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the speakers again.
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can damage your hearing, speakers and/or headphones when you turn on the System or start playback.
10
Basic.fm Page 11 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
Listening to the Radio
To select the band (FM or AM)
FM AM
Remote
ONLY
To preset the stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
1
2
Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM preset stations if selected.
Activate the preset number entry mode.
SET
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
Remote control: Main unit:
2
sec.
GROUP/TITLE
DOWN
2 sec.
UP
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the frequency stops changing.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
Remote
ONLY
If the received FM station is hard to listen
FM MODE
9
3
• Finish the following process while the indication on the display is flashing.
Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
DVD LEVEL
5
7 8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Examples:
To select preset number 5, press
5.
To select preset number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
• You can also use the
¡
or
1
buttons.
4 Store the station.
SET
Remote
ONLY
To tune in to a preset station
1
Select the band (FM or AM).
(at the same time)
The MONO indicator lights on the display. Reception will improve though stereo effect is lost—Monaural reception mode.
To restore the stereo effect, press the button again (the
MONO indicator goes off).
FM AM
2
Select a preset number for the station you store.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
• You can also use the
¡
or
1
buttons.
ZOOM
4
DVD LEVEL
5
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
FM MODE
9
10 10
11
Basic.fm Page 12 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
Playing Back a Tape
To insert a tape
You can play back tapes of types I, II, and IV.
Push Insert Close
To start:
With the tape side facing outside
To stop:
To rewind tape:
Before or after play...
GROUP/TITLE
Rewind the tape to the right.
Rewind the tape to the left.
To change the tape running direction
3
(forward play)
2
(reverse play)
To reverse the tape automatically
REV. MODE
7
(at the same time)
Tape is played from the forward side to the reverse side. When the reverse side is played back, playback stops.
Tape is automatically reversed, and playback repeats until you stop it.
Tape will not be reversed. When the current side of the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Playing Back a Disc
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays on the
TV screen.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on page 33.
If “ ” appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have tried to do, or data required for that operation is not recorded on the disc.
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
• DVD Video comprises of “ Titles ” which includes
“ Chapters ,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG comprise of
“ Groups ” which includes “ Tracks ,” and CD/SVCD/VCD comprise of only “ Tracks .”
• For JPEG playback, see “Operations on the CONTROL
Screen” on page 27.
12
Basic.fm Page 13 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
To insert a disc
You can insert a disc while playing another source.
To select a title/group
While playing...
Remote
ONLY
GROUP/TITLE
To close the disc tray, press
0
again.
• If you press DVD/CD
3
, disc tray closes automatically and playback starts (depending on how the disc is programmed internally).
To start: To pause: To stop:
DVD/CD
(at the same time)
• Group name appears for MP3/WMA discs.
To select a chapter/track
While playing...
GROUP/TITLE
• First time you press
4
, you can go back to the beginning of the current chapter/track.
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
• While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD: This System can store the stop point, and when you start playback again by pressing DVD/CD
3
(even while on standby), it starts from the position where you have stopped—Resume Play.
(“RESUME” appears on the display when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press
7 twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 36.)
• When operating the System, the on-screen guide icon (see the following table) appears on the TV.
To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 36.
On-screen guide icons
• During DVD Video playback, the following icons may appear on the TV:
At the beginning of a scene containing multiangle views.
At the beginning of a scene containing multiaudio sounds.
At the beginning of a scene containing multisubtitles.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV to indicate your current operation.
, , , , ,
Remote
ONLY
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
SLOW – SLOW
+ x2 x5 x10 x20 x2 x5 x10 x20 x60 x60
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
Remote
ONLY
To locate an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting playback , while you can select a chapter after starting playback .
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
13
Basic.fm Page 14 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
To use 3D Phonic
While playing...
3D
PHONIC
3D PHONIC ACTION
3D PHONIC OFF
(Canceled)
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
DRAMA
THEATER
• The selected mode can only be shown on the TV.
ACTION Suitable for action movies and sports programs.
DRAMA
THEATER
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy movies in a relaxed mood.
Enjoy sound effects like in a major theater.
To play back using the disc menu
7
For DVD Video/DVD Audio:
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
Remote
ONLY
7
For SVCD/VCD with PBC:
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the display.
When disc menu appears on the TV, select an item on the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
8
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10, then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
To move to the next or previous page of the current menu:
GROUP/TITLE
Moves to the next page.
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
Moves to the previous page.
To return to the previous menu:
CANCEL
RETURN
(at the same time)
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the number using the 10 keys.
To cancel PBC
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
10 10
Select a track.
Stop playback.
Playback starts with the selected track.
To reactivate PBC, press
7
(twice if Resume is turned
“ON”), then press DVD/CD
3
.
14
Basic.fm Page 15 Thursday, May 27, 2004 11:11 PM
Daily Operations
—Sound & Other Adjustments
Remote control
Adjusting the Volume
You can adjust the volume level from level 0 (VOL MIN) to level 40 (VOL MAX).
Remote control: Main unit:
VOLUME DVD LEVEL
CLOCK/
TIMER
ENTER
VFP
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SET
, , ,
VOLUME
FADE
MUTING
Remote
ONLY
To drop the volume in a moment
To restore the volume, press again, or adjust the volume level.
BASS/TREBLE
DISPLAY
DIMMER
SHIFT
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME
+/–
FADE
MUTING
Adjusting the Sound
To emphasize rhythm feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling, and also changes the subwoofer level.
RHYTHM AX
RHYTHMAX OFF
(Canceled)
Main unit
RHYTHM AX
VOLUME +/–
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to +5.
To adjust the bass
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
To adjust the treble
BASS/
TREBLE
BASS TRE
Canceled
VOLUME
15
Basic.fm Page 16 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
Remote
ONLY
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower level than for other discs and sources. You can set the increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you do not have to adjust the volume every time you change the source.
DVD LEVEL
5
NORMAL MIDDLE
HIGH
(at the same time)
NORMAL Original recording level.
MIDDLE Output level is increased (less than “HIGH”).
HIGH Output level is increased (more than
“MIDDLE”).
• Once the current DVD is ejected, this setting is canceled and set automatically to “NORMAL.”
Changing the Picture Tone
Remote
ONLY
While showing a playback picture on the TV, you can select the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own taste.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
VFP
GAMMA
BRIGHTNESS
6
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
(at the same time) On the TV
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
USER2
CINEMA
USER1
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display window.
Remote
ONLY
DIMMER
DIM1
DIM OFF
(Canceled)
DIM2
AUTO DIM
DIM1
DIM2
Dims the display.
Erases the display illumination.
AUTO DIM Erases the display illumination when disc playback starts.*
• The display illuminates when playback stops.
* “AUTO DIM” does not work for CD/MP3/WMA.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can store the settings (see below).
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
ENTER
GAMMA Adjust if the neutral color is bright or dark (–3 to +3).
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the entire picture is bright or dark (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST Adjust if the far and near positions are unnatural (–7 to +7).
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT Adjust if the human skin color is unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
16
Basic.fm Page 17 Friday, May 14, 2004 7:00 PM
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
Turning Off the Power
Automatically
Remote
ONLY
To turn off the unit after playback is over—Auto
Standby
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the screen, press VFP again while holding SHIFT.
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
On
Canceled
Setting the Clock
Remote
ONLY
Without setting the built-in clock, you cannot use Daily
Timers, Recording Timer (see page 31) and Sleep Timer.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL or CLOCK/TIMER. You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate the clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the button repeatedly until the clock setting mode is selected.
2
Adjust the hour.
SET
(at the same time)
When Auto Standby is in use, the A.STANDBY indicator lights on the display.
When disc play stops, the A.STANDBY indicator starts flashing. If no operation is done for about 3 minutes while the indicator is flashing, the System turns off (stands by) automatically.
• Auto Standby does not work while you are listening to radio (FM/AM) and the external component (AUX).
To turn off the unit after a certain period of time
—Sleep Timer
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
10 20 30 60 90 120
Canceled
150
3 Adjust the minute.
SET
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
SLEEP
Now the built-in clock starts working.
To check the current clock time during play
DISPLAY
Clock
Source information
• While playing a DVD and MP3/WMA, you cannot check the current clock time (see page 9) .
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can change the shutoff time.
17
UniqueDVD.fm Page 18 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM
Remote control
SUB TITLE
AUDIO
ZOOM
, , ,
DVD/CD
3
8
SHIFT
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
ANGLE
10 keys
Selecting the View Angle
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a chapter (of DVD Video) containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene from different angles.
• You can also select the multi-view angles using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing...
ANGLE
3
ENTER
7
SLOW –/+
Ex.:
1/3
1
1/3
1
(at the same time)
2/3
2
2/3
2
3/3
3
3/3
3
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter (of DVD
Video) containing subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle language to display on the TV.
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
• You can also select the subtitle language using the onscreen bar (see page 24).
While playing a DVD Video...
1
Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
ENGLISH
SUB TITLE
2
1/3
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
18
UniqueDVD.fm Page 19 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM
2
Select the subtitle language.
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
Ex.:
1/3
ENGLISH
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
3/3
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing a DVD Audio...
Ex.:
1/3 2/3
1 2
3/3
3
While playing an SVCD video...
SUB TITLE
2
–/4
OFF
(at the same time)
1/4
1
4/4
4
3/4
3
AUDIO
1
(at the same time)
2/4
2
Selecting the Audio Track
Remote
ONLY
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 24).
While playing a Karaoke SVCD or VCD...
AUDIO
1
SVCD
ST1
R2
VCD
ST
ST2
L2
L
(at the same time)
L1
R1
R
ST1/ST2
ST
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to normal stereo (2 channel) playback.
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
Playing Back a Bonus Group
Remote
ONLY
Some DVD Audios have a special group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to the public.
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
1
Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group” on page 13.
19
UniqueDVD.fm Page 20 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:59 PM
2
Enter the key number.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
3
Follow the interactive instructions shown on the screen.
To cancel the key number entry, press
7
.
Special Effect Playback
Still picture playback
Remote
ONLY
To start still picture playback:
While playing...
To resume normal playback:
DVD/CD
Frame-by-frame playback
1
2
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
Advance the still picture frame by frame.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD
3
.
Slow-motion playback
1
While playing...
Still picture playback starts.
2
Select slow motion speed.
SLOW – SLOW +
Forward slow motion starts.
Reverse slow motion* starts.
SLOW
+
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
SLOW –
1/32 1/16 1/8 1/4 1/2
*Not available for SVCD/VCD.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3 .
To replay the previous scenes
(One-Touch Replay)
• This function is only used while playing DVD Video.
While playing back...
The playback position moves back about 10 seconds before the current position (only within the same title).
Zoom
1
Remote
ONLY
While playing back...
ZOOM
4
(at the same time)
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 6
ZOOM 3 ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
20
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 21 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM
Remote control
10 keys
,
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
Main unit
DVD/CD
3
4 , 7 , ¢
Advanced Disc Operations
Programming the Playing Order—
Program Play
Remote
ONLY
You can arrange the playing order of the chapters or tracks
(up to 99) before you start playback.
1
Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY
MODE
PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
ENTER
CANCEL
7
PLAY
MODE
REPEAT
REPEAT A-B
PRGM
On the display
PROGRAM
No
1
8
9
6
7
10
2
3
4
5
Group/Title Track/Chapter
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
On the TV
2
Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
• For DVD/MP3/WMA:
1 Select a title or group number.
2
3
Select a chapter or track number.
Repeat the above steps 1 and 2 .
• For SVCD/VCD/CD:
1 Select tracks.
To enter the numbers directly:
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10, then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
10 10
0
21
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 22 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM
3
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
Playing at Random—Random Play
Remote
ONLY
You can play all chapters or tracks at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1
Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To skip a step:
GROUP/TITLE
To pause:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
In the reverse order.
To stop:
RANDOM
2
Start playback.
DVD/CD
Playback starts in random order.
Random Play ends when the entire disc has been played.
In the programmed order.
• You can also use
4
or
¢
to check the programmed contents.
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step: To erase the entire program:
CANCEL
RETURN
To skip a chapter/ track:
To pause: To stop:
To release, press
DVD/CD
3
.
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 .
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY
MODE PROGRAM
Canceled
RANDOM
22
AdvancedDisc.fm Page 23 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:58 PM
Playing Repeatedly
Remote
ONLY
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar (see page 25).
Repeat Play
You can repeat playback.
• For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP CHAP
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP TTL
• For DVD Audio:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP GRP
REP OFF
(Canceled)
• For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP GRP
REP ALL
• For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD) or before playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP TRK
*
REP OFF
(Canceled)
REP ALL
REP CHAP * Repeats the current chapter.
REP TTL Repeats the current title.
REP TRK * Repeats the current track.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc or program.
*During Program Play and Random Play, “REP STEP” appears instead of these indications, and repeat modes change as follows for all the discs.
REP STEP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
A-B Repeat
You can repeat playback of a desired portion by specifying the beginning (point A) and the ending (point B).
• A-B Repeat cannot be used for MP3/WMA and for some
DVDs.
• A-B Repeat can be used within the same title while playing a DVD Video, and within the same track for the other discs.
1
While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), select the start point (A).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
starts flashing on the display.
• A appears on the TV if the TV is turned on.
(at the same time)
2
Select the end point (B).
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
stops flashing.
•
TV.
A-B appears on the
• You can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
(at the same time)
To cancel A-B Repeat, press REPEAT A-B again while holding SHIFT.
• A-B Repeat will also be canceled when you stop play or skip the chapter or track.
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock
Main Unit
ONLY
You can lock the disc tray so that no one can eject the loaded disc.
• This is possible while the System is on standby.
While the disc tray is closed...
(at the same time)
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
23
OSDOperation.fm Page 24 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM
24
On-Screen Disc Operations
Remote control
ZOOM
, , ,
ON SCREEN
DVD/CD
3
8
4
/
¢
SHIFT
On-screen bars
DVD Video
1
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
DVD Audio
1
2 3
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4
2 3
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF
SVCD
1
SVCD
TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 3
4
2 3
TITLE 14
/ 1/3
CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
VCD
1
VCD
2
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
3
4
CD
1 2 3
CD TITLE 14 CHAP
1/3
23
1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1/3
4
10 keys
ENTER
CANCEL
7
REPEAT
¡
On-screen Bar Information
You can check the disc information (except for MP3/WMA/
JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-screen bar.
1 Disc type
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
Mbps Current transfer rate
(Megabits per second)
TITLE 2 Current title
CHAP 3
GROUP 1
TRACK 14
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
TOTAL 1:25:58 Time indications
3 Operation modes
Indication Meanings
Playback
/
/ Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
4 Function icons (on the pull-down menu)
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication.
OFF
CHAP.
TRACK
Select to repeat playback.
Select for time search.
Select for chapter search.
Select for track search.
1/3
1/3
1/3
PAGE 1 / 5
Select to change the audio language or channel (see also page 19).
Select to change subtitle language
(see also page 18).
Select to change the view angle (see also page 18).
Select to change the page.
OSDOperation.fm Page 25 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM
Operations Using the On-screen Bar
Remote
ONLY
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video
While a disc is selected as the source...
1
Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
ON SCREEN
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 2 CHAP 3 TIME 0:00:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
14
1 / 1/3
23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 1/3
Goes off
2
Select (highlight) the item you want.
For detailed operations of the following functions, see also “Operations Using the On-screen Bar” on the left.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar and the display window on the main unit.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
ENTER
TIME 0:00:58
T.REM 0:35:24
REM 0:11:23
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
3
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER
TITLE 14
1
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
ENGLISH
4
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 1/3
23
2 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
FRENCH
5
Finish the setting.
ENTER
Pop-up window goes off.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
TIME
REM
TOTAL
T.REM
Elapsed playing time of the current chapter/track.
Remaining time of the current chapter/ track.
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
To erase the on-screen bar
ON SCREEN
Repeat Play
• See also page 23.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected before starting playback.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
OFF
25
OSDOperation.fm Page 26 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
A-B
TITLE
TRACK *
OFF
Repeats a desired portion (see below).
Repeats the current title.
GROUP
ALL
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD) or program.
CHAPTER * Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels Repeat Play.
* During Program Play and Random Play, “STEP” appears.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
A-B Repeat
• See also page 23.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP 23 TOTAL 1:25:58
1 / 1/3 1 / 1/3 1 1/3
OFF
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before starting playback.
2 Select .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1 /
CHAP
1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
4 Enter the time.
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
Examples:
To move to a point of 1
(hours): 02 (minutes): 00
(seconds), press 1, 0, 2, 0, then
0.
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press
0, 5, 4, 0, then 0.
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0” hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
• last two digits in the examples above).
To correct a misentry, press Cursor < to erase the last entry.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the disc from the selected playing time.
4 Select “A-B.”
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CHAP
1 / 1/3
23
1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
A–B
5 Select the start point (A).
ENTER
DVD-VIDEO
A-
8.5Mbps
CHAP.
TITLE 14 CH
1 / 1/3
6 Select the end point (B).
ENTER
A-B Repeat starts. The selected portion plays repeatedly.
• Before pressing ENTER, you can search for the end point using the
¡
button.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3 , and select “OFF” in step 4 .
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the chapter (DVD Video) or track (DVD
Audio) number to play.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pulldown menu.
2 Select CHAP.
or TRACK .
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-VIDEO 8.5Mbps
TITLE 14 CHAP 23
CHAP.
CHAPTER _
1 1/3 1 / 1/3
TOTAL 1:25:58
1 1/3
26
OSDOperation.fm Page 27 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
AUDIO
1
SUB TITLE
2
ANGLE
3
ZOOM
4
REV. MODE
7
DVD LEVEL
5
8
VFP
6
FM MODE
9
PROGRESSIVE
0
Examples:
To select chapter/track 5, press
5.
To select chapter/track 15, press 1, then 5.
To select chapter/track 30, press 3, then 0.
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the desired number shown in the pop-up window.
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
The System starts playing the searched chapter or track.
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
Remote
ONLY
While playing back a track (of DVD Audio) linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), you can select the still picture
(turn the page) to be shown on the TV.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (BSP), they are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
1 While playing a DVD Audio, display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
3 Display the pop-up window.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 1 / 5
1
4 Select a still picture you want.
DVD-AUDIO
TIME OFF TRACK
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:00:58
1 / 3 PAGE 3 / 5
3
5 Finish the setting.
ENTER
Operations on t he CONTROL Screen
Remote
ONLY
The CONTROL screen automatically appears on the TV when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
You can search for and play the desired tracks through the
CONTROL screen.
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see page 35).
CONTROL screen
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
1
2
3
4
Group : 2 / 3
Spring
Summer
Fall
Winter
Track Information
Title
Rain
Artist
Album
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
Winter sky.mp3
6
7
8
9
0
-
5
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group (in blue)
3 Group list
4 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
5 Current track (in blue)
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the current group (total number of tracks on the loaded disc)
0 Highlight (green) bar
Track list
27
OSDOperation.fm Page 28 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:56 PM
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and track list:
Moves the bar to the track list.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
REP GRP REP ALL
REP OFF
(Canceled)
Moves the bar to the group list.
To select a group/track in the list:
Move the highlight bar to a desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar while playing back an MP3/
WMA disc, the selected track starts playback automatically.
REP GRP Repeats the current group.
REP ALL Repeats the disc.
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see page 23.
To zoom in the still picture
• You cannot zoom in the still picture during slide-show.
1
While playing back a still picture...
• During slide-show, press
8
to display the still picture, then...
To start playback
For MP3/WMA:
ZOOM
4
ENTER
Playback starts with the selected track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts playback.
(at the same time)
For JPEG:
ZOOM
4
ZOOM 1
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 2
ENTER
The selected track (still picture) is displayed until you change it.
2
Move the zoomed-in position.
DVD/CD
Slide-show playback starts.
Each track (still picture) is shown on the screen for about 3 seconds, then changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the CONTROL screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture, press
8
.
To skip a track:
GROUP/TITLE
To stop playback:
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly (while holding
SHIFT) until “ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV.
28
AdvancedTape.fm Page 29 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:55 PM
Remote control
REV. MODE
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
7
SHIFT
Advanced Tape Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 12.
1
Insert a recordable cassette.
Push Insert Close
FM/AM
AUX
With the tape side facing outside
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
Reverse mode indicator
Main unit
TAPE
2 3
DVD/CD
3
REC
PUSH OPEN 0
FM/AM
AUX
7
Tape direction indicator
To change the direction
Current source
3
(forward)
2
(reverse)
To change the Reverse mode if necessary
REV. MODE
7
(
(at the same time)
)
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
AdvancedTape.fm Page 30 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:55 PM
3
Select and start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,”
“DVD/CD,” or “AUX.”
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see below).
4
Start recording.
REC
To record Program Play or Random Play
1 Select Program Play (and make a program) or Random
Play, but do not start playback.
2 Press REC to start recording.
• When disc play stops, recording continues. It is required that recording be stopped manually.
To stop recording:
On the main unit
To record only your favorite track
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
1
Start playing a disc.
DVD/CD
Synchronized Disc Recording
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at the same time.
To record the entire disc
1
Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
• If the current playing source is not the disc player, press
DVD/CD
3
, then
7
.
2
Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3
Start recording.
REC
The System automatically creates 4-second blanks between the tunes recorded on the tapes.
2
While a track you want to record on the tape is playing...
REC
On the main unit
The disc player returns to the beginning of that track and the track is recorded on the tape.
After recording the track, the disc player and cassette deck automatically stop.
3
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to record other tracks you want.
• You can exchange the discs if necessary.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back to protect from unexpected erasure or re-recording.
To protect your recording, remove these tabs.
On the main unit
• When either disc play* or recording ends, both disc player and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
• If you press REC soon after the recording is stopped, “NO
REC” may appear.
* For DVD Video: When a title is finished playing.
To record a “Live” disc
It will not be desirable to put 4-second blank portions between the tunes recorded on the tape.
To record the entire disc without any interruption recorded, pause the disc play (press DVD/CD
3
, then
8
) before pressing REC.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover the holes with adhesive tape.
30
Timer.fm Page 31 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:54 PM
Remote control
SET
,
Timer Operations
STANDBY/ON
CLOCK/
TIMER
CANCEL
Setting the Timer
Remote
ONLY
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You can store three Daily Timer settings and one
Recording Timer setting; however, you can activate only one of Daily Timers and Recording Timer at the same time.
• To exit from the timer setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1
Select one of the timer setting modes you want to set—
Daily 1 ON time, Daily 2 ON time, Daily 3 ON time, or
Recording Timer ON time.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 setting mode is selected
2
Make the timer setting as you want.
Repeat the following operations until you finish setting in the following order—
SET
* Daily Timer initial settings when shipped from the factory
• DAILY 1:ON Time (6:00)/OFF Time (8:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 2:ON Time (12:00)/OFF Time (14:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
• DAILY 3:ON Time (18:00)/OFF Time (20:00)/
Source (TUNER FM 1)/Volume level (– –)
For Daily Timers:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
“TUNER AM,” “TAPE,” “DISC,” or “AUX.”
1
4 For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
For “DISC”: Select the title/group number, then the chapter/track number.
31
Timer.fm Page 32 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:54 PM
5 Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOL 0” to
“VOL 50” and “VOL – –”).
If you select “VOL – –,” the volume is set to the last level when the unit has been turned off.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
For Recording Timer:
1 Set the hour then the minute for on-time.
2 Set the hour then the minute for off-time.
3 Select the playback source—“TUNER FM,”
4
“TUNER AM,” or “AUX.”
For “TUNER FM” and “TUNER AM”: Select a preset channel.
Once settings are complete, the Timer setting information appears in sequence.
3
Turn off the unit (on standby) if you have set the timer with the System turned on.
STANDBY/ON
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer ( ) indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or changes the source to “AUX”, sets the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
When the off-time comes
The System stops recording, and turns off (stands by).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
To turn off the Timer after its setting is done
Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday, you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
• Recording Timer can also be canceled temporarily.
1 Select the Timer you want to cancel.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 * ON (Time)
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 * ON (Time)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 * ON (Time)
Canceled Clock setting
(see page 17)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
How Daily Timer actually works
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) are lit on the display. Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until the timer is turned off manually (see the next column) or another timer is activated.
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, starts playing the specified source
(except “AUX”), and sets the volume level to the preset level.
• While Daily Timer is working, the timer ( ) indicator and timer number indicator (1/2/3) flash on the display.
When the off-time comes
The System stops playback, and turns off (stands by) automatically.
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change it.
1
2 Turn off the selected Timer.
Ex.To cancel Daily
Timer 1
CANCEL
RETURN
To turn on the Timer
1 Select the Timer (DAILY 1/2/3, and REC TMR) you want to activate.
CLOCK/
TIMER
Daily 1 Timer
DAILY 1 ON (Time)
Canceled
Daily 2 Timer
DAILY 2 ON (Time)
Clock setting
(see page 17)
Daily 3 Timer
DAILY 3 ON (Time)
ON (Time) REC TMR
Recording Timer
2 Activate the selected Timer.
SET
1
Ex. When Daily Timer 1 (DAILY 1) is activated
3 Wait until the indication goes off.
32
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 33 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
Remote control
, , ,
SHIFT
Setup Menu Icons
The icon for the selected Setup Menu will be highlighted.
Ex.: LANGUAGE Setup Menu is selected.
1 2 3 4
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
Setup Menu Operations
10 keys
SET UP
ENTER
.
Operating Procedure
Remote
ONLY
You can use the Setup Menus only when a disc is selected as the source and its playback is not yet started.
Ex.: Selecting “STILL PICTURE” for “FILE TYPE”:
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
(at the same time)
2
Select one of the Setup Menus.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
3
Select the item you want to adjust.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Display the pop-up window.
ENTER PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
5
Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
STILL PICTURE
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT . USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
1 LANGUAGE Setup Menu
2 PICTURE Setup Menu
3 AUDIO Setup Menu
4 OTHERS Setup Menu
33
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 34 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
6
Finish the setting.
ENTER
7
Repeat steps 3 to 4 to set other items on the same
Setup Menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other items on another Setup
Menu.
SUBTITLE
Some discs have multiple subtitle languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43) or “OFF (no subtitle).”
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
Select one of the languages shown on the TV from—
ENGLISH, CHINESE and SPANISH.
To exit from the Setup Menu
SET UP
MENU
PICTURE Setup Menu
You can select the desired options concerning a picture or monitor screen.
(at the same time)
PICTURE
MONITOR TYPE
PICTURE SOURCE
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
4:3 LB
AUTO
ON
AUDIO
LANGUAGE Setup Menu
You can select the initial languages for disc playback. You can also select the language shown on the TV screen while operating this System.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
MENU LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple menu languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
AUDIO LANGUAGE
Some discs have multiple audio languages.
Select from—ENGLISH, SPANISH, FRENCH, CHINESE,
GERMAN, ITALIAN, JAPANESE, AA – ZU (see
“Language Code List” on page 43).
MONITOR TYPE
Select the monitor type of your TV to play DVD Video recorded with aspect ratio of 16:9.
For the multi-color system TV
When you use a multi-color system TV, you can change the color system of the System automatically by selecting
“MULTI” options for the monitor type. In this case, the color system of the System is changed to match to that of the loaded disc regardless of the VIDEO OUT SELECT setting
(see page 6).
Select one of the following:
16:9 / 16:9 MULTI:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (wide
TV).
4:3 LB (Letter Box) / 4:3 MULTI LB:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3
(conventional TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear on the top and the bottom of the screen.
4:3 PS (Pan Scan) / 4:3 MULTI PS:
Select when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not appear; however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not be shown on the screen.
34
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 35 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
Ex.: 16:9 Ex.: 4:3 LB Ex: 4:3 PS
AUDIO Setup Menu
You can adjust the sound settings of the System.
AUDIO
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
DOWN MIX
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY SURROUND
AUTO
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting an appropriate option—picture source type (either video source or film source).
Select one of the following:
AUTO:
FILM:
Normally select this.
When playing back a disc containing both video and film sources, the System automatically changes the processing to match it to the picture type (film or video source) of the current chapter.
To play a film source disc.
VIDEO: To play a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
You can activate or deactivate screen saver while operating the built-in disc player.
Select one of the following:
ON: The pictures on the TV becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
FILE TYPE
If both audio tracks (MP3 or WMA files) and still picture
(JPEG files) are recorded on a disc, you can select which to play.
Select one of the following:
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
When using the digital output terminal on the rear, set this correctly according to the connected component.
Select one of the following:
PCM ONLY: To connect to a linear PCM digital equipment such as an MD recorder.
DOLBY DIGITAL
/PCM:
To connect to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-in Dolby
Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: To connect to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
• See also “DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals” on page 45.
DOWN MIX
When playing a multi-channel DVD, the System converts the signals into 2 channels.
Downmix setting is effective for the speaker output (and digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM ONLY”) from this System.
Select one of the following:
DOLBY
SURROUND:
To connect an amplifier with the Dolby
Pro Logic decoder.
STEREO: To connect a conventional stereo amplifier, receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
35
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 36 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
D. RANGE COMPRESSION
You can compress the dynamic range (the difference between the loudest sound and the softest sound) to enjoy a powerful sound even at a low volume level when listening to
Dolby Digital software. This is useful at night.
• The effectiveness varies depends on software.
Select one of the following:
AUTO: To enjoy powerful sounds with full dynamic range.
ON: Best for watching a movie at a low volume level.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons (see page 13).
• When recording the picture on a VCR, select “OFF” to avoid recording the guide icons on your video tape.
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate the on-screen guide icons.
OFF: To cancel the on-screen guide icons.
OTHERS Setup Menu
You can change some other convenient functions.
RESUME
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
You can activate or deactivate Resume for disc playback
(see page 13).
Select one of the following:
ON: To activate Resume.
OFF: To cancel Resume.
AV COMPULINK MODE
When connecting the System to a JVC’s TV with the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system, select the proper setting.
Select one of the following:
DVD1: To connect to the VIDEO-3 Input jacks on the
TV.
DVD2:
DVD3:
To connect to the VIDEO-1 Input jacks on the
TV.
To connect to the VIDEO-2 Input jacks on the
TV.
• For details, see “AV COMPU LINK remote control system” on page 6.
PARENTAL LOCK
Select this to enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
See the section that follows.
36
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 37 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
Restricting the Review
—Parental Lock
Remote
ONLY
You can restrict playback of DVD Video containing violent scenes and those unsuitable for your family members. Once you have set the rating level, such violent scenes (for which a higher level than you set is assigned) may be skipped or changed to another scene (depending on how the disc is programmed).
To set Parental Lock
Set the rating level—Level 1 (most restrictive) to Level 8
(least restrictive).
1
Display the Setup Menu.
SET UP
MENU
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
5
Select “COUNTRY CODE,” then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
AS
AT
AU
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
6
Select the country code of your area.
• See “Country/Area Codes List” on page 44 to find your country code.
ENTER
SELECT
ENTER
(at the same time)
2
Select the OTHERS Setup Menus.
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
The System automatically enters “SET LEVEL” mode.
7
Make sure “SET LEVEL” is selected, then display the pop-up window.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
5
4
3
8
7
8
Set the rating level (NONE, 8 – 1).
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
ENTER
3
Select “PARENTAL LOCK.”
O T H E R S
RESUME
ON SCREEN GUIDE
AV COMPULINK MODE
PARENTAL LOCK
ON
ON
DVD1
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
4
Enter the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
ENTER
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
AU
NONE
_ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
USE TO SELECT. USE ENTER TO CONFIRM
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
The System automatically enters “PASSWORD” entry mode.
9
Make sure “PASSWORD” is selected, then enter any
4-digit number for your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
10
Finish the setting.
ENTER
37
ChoiceMenu.fm Page 38 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:53 PM
To change the setting
1
Display the PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• Follow steps 1 to 4 of “To set Parental Lock.”
To release Parental Lock temporarily
When you set a strict rating level, some discs may not be played back at all. When you try to play such a disc, the following screen appears on the TV.
PA R E N TA L L O C K
COUNTRY CODE
SET LEVEL
PASSWORD
EXIT
AU
4
_ _ _ _
PA R E N TA L L O C K
TEMPORARY RELEASE
NOT RELEASE
PASSWORD _ _ _ _
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
TO EXIT, PRESS [SET UP].
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
• You cannot select any item other than “EXIT” until you enter the correct password.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password, “– – – –” appears again.
If you missed three times, “EXIT” is automatically selected. In this case, press ENTER to exit from the
PARENTAL LOCK submenu.
• If you forget your password, enter “8888.”
3
Change the settings.
• Follow steps 5 to 8 of “To set Parental Lock.”
4
Enter your password again (after selecting
“PASSWORD” manually if necessary).
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you want to change a password, enter a new four digit number in this step.
SELECT
ENTER
PASSWORD? ••• PRESS 0 ~ 9 KEYS
1
Select “TEMPORARY RELEASE,” then ENTER.
“PASSWORD” is automatically selected.
ENTER
• If you do not play back such a disc, select “NOT
RELEASE,” then ENTER. Then eject the disc.
2
Enter your password.
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7 8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
ENTER
• If you enter a wrong password three times, “NOT
RELEASE” is automatically selected. In this case, press
ENTER. Then eject the disc.
38
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 39 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM
Additional Information
Learning More about This System
Getting Started
(see pages 3 to 6)
Changing the Scanning Mode
• To enjoy the progressive video picture, connect a TV with the progressive video input using component video cord.
Before Operating the System
(see pages 7 to 9)
Playable Disc Types:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with this setting set to “PAL,” you can watch the playback pictures (the disc will be reproduced using “PAL 60” format), but the TV screen may roll over upward and downward rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with this setting set to “NTSC,” you can watch the playback pictures, but the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
Daily Operations—Playback
(see pages 10 to 14)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number, the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Tape:
• It is not recommended to use the C-120 or longer tapes. These tapes easily jams in the pinch rollers and the capstans, and may cause characteristic deterioration.
Playing Back a Disc:
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– This System cannot play “packet write” discs.
– MP3/WMA discs are required a longer readout time than regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will be skipped. This result from their recording processes and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1 or
Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3 file at a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps. This
System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less than 64 kbps.
– This System can recognize the total of 1000 tracks and of 99 groups (each group can contain up to 150 tracks). Those exceeding the maximum number cannot be recognized.
– Playback order of MP3/WMA tracks may be different from the one you have intended while recording (see page 40). If a folder does not include MP3/WMA tracks, they are ignored.
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the disc tray.
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations may be different from what is explained in this manual, due to the programming and disc structure; such differences are not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• 3D Phonic setting is also applied to the optical digital output signals through the DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal.
• When using Resume on SVCD or VCD with PBC, the playback might start on a position slightly different from where you have stopped.
• You can use Resume only for the DVD/SVCD/VCD except for some discs—depending how the disc is programmed.
Daily Operations—Sound & Other Adjustments
(see pages 15 to 17)
Adjusting the Volume:
• Be sure to turn down the volume before connecting or putting the headphones.
Adjusting the Sound:
• This function also affects the sound through the headphones.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this happens, reset the clock.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
(see pages 18 to 20)
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be reproduced.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Advanced Disc Operations
(see pages 21 to 23)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• If you try to program a 100th track, “MEM FULL” appears on the display.
• While programming steps...
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program an item number that does not exist on the disc (for example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12 tracks).
Playing at Random—Random Play:
• The 4 button does not work for skipping chapters or tracks, but only work for going back to the beginning of the current chapter or track.
39
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 40 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM
On-Screen Disc Operations
(see pages 24 to 28)
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files. Progressive
JPEG files or lossless JPEG files cannot be played.
Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras, web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format: Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used now.
– This System may not play back JPEG files properly which are recorded by the devices other than digital still camera.
– If progressive or lossless JPEG files are played back, a black screen appears. In this case, stop playback and select a baseline JPEG file. Note that it may take a long time to select another file.
Advanced Tape Operations
(see pages 29 to 30)
Recording on a Tape:
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus, you can adjust the sound you are actually listening to without affecting the recording level.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the start and end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording CDs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to ensure that the recording will be made without any music part lost.
• If you start recording with no cassette inserted, “NO TAPE” appears on the display. If a protected tape has been inserted,
“NO REC” appears.
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in the forward (
3
) direction first; otherwise, recording will stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
• You can also change Reverse Mode setting ( after starting recording.
and
• You cannot open or close the disc tray while recording.
)
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction ( during recording with Reverse Mode set to
3
)
, the last tune will be re-recorded at the beginning of the reverse side.
Timer Operations
(see pages 31 to 32)
• When using an external component—“AUX” for the playback source, set the timer built in the component at the same time.
• Before turning off the power, do not forget to prepare the required materials—a disc or tape for playback and a recordable tape for recording.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the source after Recording Timer start recording.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Daily Timer starts playing the selected source, Daily Timer is canceled.
• If you set the Sleep Timer after Recording Timer starts recording, Recording Timer is canceled, but recording continues until Sleep Timer shuts off the power.
Setup Menu Operations
(see pages 33 to 38)
LANGUAGE:
• When the language you have selected for “MENU
LANGUAGE,” “AUDIO LANGUAGE,” or “SUBTITLE” is not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the initial language.
PICTURE—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS” is selected, the screen size may become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Video discs. This depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9” for a picture whose aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS multi-channel software is played back.
OTHERS—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• Setup Menus and on-screen bar will be displayed (and recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zooming in always appear on the display regardless of this setting.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups/tracks configuration
This System plays back the tracks as follows.
Level 1
ROOT
Level 2
Hierarchy
Level 3 Level 4
01 03 04
02
1
2
3
4
5
6
05
7
8
Level 5
9
10
11
12
01
Group with its play order
1
Track with its play order
40
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 41 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM
Maintenance
.
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs, tapes, and mechanism clean
Handling discs
• When removing the disc from its case, hold it at the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes, and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center to edge.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strongly.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.
• DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact for a long time.
Handling cassette tapes
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System turned off).
41
AdditonalInfo.fm Page 42 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:52 PM
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list for a possible solution before calling for service.
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before you finish.
]
There is a time limit. Repeat the procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
]
The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to external electrical interference.
Unplug the AC power cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
]
The path between the remote control and the remote sensor on the System is blocked.
]
The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
]
Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
]
Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
]
The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV, the picture is blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
]
The System is connected to a TV which does not support progressive scanning.
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the screen.
]
Select “4:3 LB” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see page 34).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
]
Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
]
]
The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
]
The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3/WMA disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
MP3/WMA/JPEG groups and tracks are not played back as you expect.
]
The playing order is determined when the disc was recorded. It depends on the writing application.
MP3/WMA or JPEG tracks are not played back.
]
The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only play
] back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting (see page 35).
You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
“NO AUDIO” appears.
]
This System cannot play back illegally produced DVD
Audio discs.
“LR ONLY” appears.
]
Some DVD Audio discs prohibit downmixed output. When you play back such a disc, this System plays back the left front and right front signals only.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
]
The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc tray does not open or close.
]
The AC power cord is not plugged in.
]
Child Lock is in use (see page 23).
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recordings:
Impossible to record.
]
Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed. Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer and Recording Timer do not work.
]
The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Daily Timer does not start playback.
]
The disc loaded is a DVD video. Change the disc.
]
Title/group number and chapter/track number are not entered while setting the Daily Timer. Do not skip these steps when you want to play a disc using Daily Timer.
Setup Menu Operations:
No subtitle appears on the display though you have selected the initial subtitle language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always display no subtitle initially. If this happens, select the subtitle after starting play
(see page 18).
Audio language is different from the one you have selected as the initial audio language.
]
Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original language initially. If this happens, select the audio language after starting play (see page 19).
42
AdditionlList.fm Page 43 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM
Language Code List
EL
EO
ET
EU
FA
FI
FJ
FO
BO
BR
CA
CO
CS
CY
DA
DZ
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
AA
AB
AF
AM
AR
AS
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
HR
HU
HY
IA
IE
FY
GA
GD
GL
GN
GU
HA
HI
Tibetan
Breton
Catalan
Corsican
Czech
Welsh
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
Faroese
Afar
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
Ameharic
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
Bislama
Bengali, Bangla
Frisian
Irish
Scots Gaelic
Galician
Guarani
Gujarati
Hausa
Hindi
Croatian
Hungarian
Armenian
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Yiddish
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
(Afan) Oromo
Oriya
Javanese
Georgian
Kazakh
Greenlandic
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
Kirghiz
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Panjabi
Polish
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
Rhaeto-Romance
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
Kinyarwanda
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Sangho
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
OM
OR
MI
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
LV
MG
JW
KA
KK
KL
KM
KN
KO
KS
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
SK
RM
RN
RO
RU
RW
PA
PL
PS
PT
QU
Turkmen
Tagalog
Setswana
Tonga
Turkish
Tsonga
Tatar
Twi
Ukrainian
Urdu
Uzbek
Vietnamese
Volapuk
Wolof
Xhosa
Yoruba
Zulu
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
Somali
Albanian
Serbian
Siswati
Sesotho
Sundanese
Swedish
Swahili
Tamil
Telugu
Tajik
Thai
Tigrinya
UK
UR
UZ
VI
VO
WO
XH
YO
ZU
TK
TL
TN
TO
TR
TS
TT
TW
SU
SV
SW
TA
TE
TG
TH
TI
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
ST
43
AdditionlList.fm Page 44 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM
Country/Area Codes List
√
AD
AE
AF
AG
AI
AL
AM
AN
AO
Andorra
United Arab Emirates
Afghanistan
Antigua and Barbuda
Anguilla
Albania
AQ
AR
AS
AT
AU
AW
Armenia
Netherlands Antilles
Angola
Antarctica
Argentina
American Samoa
AZ
BA
BB
BD
BE
BF
Austria
Australia
Aruba
Azerbaijan
Bosnia and Herzegovina
Barbados
BG
BH
BI
Bangladesh
Belgium
Burkina Faso
Bulgaria
Bahrain
Burundi
BJ Benin
BM Bermuda
BN Brunei Darussalam
BO
BR
BS
Bolivia
Brazil
Bahamas
BT
BV
Bhutan
Bouvet Island
BW Botswana
BY
BZ
CA
Belarus
Belize
Canada
CC
CF
Cocos (Keeling) Islands
Central African Republic
CG Congo
CH Switzerland
CI Côte d’Ivoire
CK Cook Islands
CL Chile
CM Cameroon
CN China
CO Colombia
CR Costa Rica
CU Cuba
CV
CX
CY
Cape Verde
Christmas Island
Cyprus
CZ
DE
DJ
Czech Republic
Germany
Djibouti
44
EG
EH
ER
ES
ET
FI
DK Denmark
DM Dominica
DO Dominican Republic
DZ
EC
EE
Algeria
Ecuador
Estonia
Egypt
Western Sahara
Eritrea
Spain
Ethiopia
Finland
FJ
FK
Fiji
Falkland Islands (Malvinas)
FM Micronesia (Federated States of)
FO Faroe Islands
FR
FX
France
France, Metropolitan
GA Gabon
GB United Kingdom
GD Grenada
GE Georgia
GF French Guiana
GH Ghana
GI Gibraltar
GL Greenland
GM Gambia
GN Guinea
GP Guadeloupe
GQ Equatorial Guinea
GR Greece
GS
GT
South Georgia and the South
Sandwich
Guatemala
GU Guam
GW Guinea-Bissau
GY Guyana
HK Hong Kong
HM Heard Island and McDonald
Islands
IL
IN
IO
IQ
IR
IS
IT
JM
HN Honduras
HR Croatia
HT Haiti
HU Hungary
ID Indonesia
IE Ireland
Israel
India
British Indian Ocean Territory
Iraq
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Iceland
Italy
Jamaica
JO
JP
Jordan
Japan
KE Kenya
KG Kyrgyzstan
KH Cambodia
KI Kiribati
KM Comoros
KN Saint Kitts and Nevis
KP Korea, Democratic People’s
Republic of
KR Korea, Republic of
KW Kuwait
KY Cayman Islands
KZ Kazakhstan
LA Lao People’s Democratic
Republic
LB
LC
Lebanon
Saint Lucia
LI Liechtenstein
LK Sri Lanka
LR Liberia
LS
LT
LU
Lesotho
Lithuania
Luxembourg
LV
LY
Latvia
Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
MA Morocco
MC Monaco
MD Moldova, Republic of
MG Madagascar
MH Marshall Islands
ML Mali
MM Myanmar
MN Mongolia
MO Macau
MP Northern Mariana Islands
MQ Martinique
MR Mauritania
MS Montserrat
MT Malta
MU Mauritius
MV Maldives
MW Malawi
MX Mexico
MY Malaysia
MZ Mozambique
NA Namibia
NC New Caledonia
NE Niger
NF Norfolk Island
NG Nigeria
NI Nicaragua
NL Netherlands
NO Norway
AdditionlList.fm Page 45 Friday, May 14, 2004 6:51 PM
PE
PF
PG
PH
PK
PL
NP Nepal
NR Nauru
NU Niue
NZ New Zealand
OM Oman
PA Panama
Peru
French Polynesia
Papua New Guinea
Philippines
Pakistan
Poland
PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon
PN Pitcairn
PR Puerto Rico
PT Portugal
PW Palau
PY Paraguay
QA Qatar
RE Réunion
RO Romania
RU Russian Federation
RW Rwanda
SA Saudi Arabia
SB
SC
SD
Solomon Islands
Seychelles
Sudan
SE
SG
SH
SI
SJ
SK
Sweden
Singapore
Saint Helena
Slovenia
Svalbard and Jan Mayen
Slovakia
SL Sierra Leone
SM San Marino
SN Senegal
SO
SR
ST
Somalia
Suriname
Sao Tome and Principe
SV
SY
SZ
TC
TD
TF
El Salvador
Syrian Arab Republic
Swaziland
Turks and Caicos Islands
Chad
French Southern Territories
TG
TH
TJ
Togo
Thailand
Tajikistan
TK Tokelau
TM Turkmenistan
TN Tunisia
TO
TP
TR
Tonga
East Timor
Turkey
TT
TV
Trinidad and Tobago
Tuvalu
TW Taiwan
TZ Tanzania, United Republic of
UA Ukraine
UG Uganda
UM United States Minor Outlying
Islands
US United States
UY Uruguay
UZ Uzbekistan
VA Vatican City State (Holy See)
VC Saint Vincent and the Grenadines
VE Venezuela
VG Virgin Islands (British)
VI Virgin Islands (U.S.)
VN Vietnam
VU Vanuatu
WF Wallis and Futuna Islands
WS Samoa
YE Yemen
YT Mayotte
YU Yugoslavia
ZA South Africa
ZM Zambia
ZR Zaire
ZW Zimbabwe
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Playback disc
DVD Video with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM with 96 kHz, Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
DVD Audio with 48/96/192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz,
16/20/24 bit Linear PCM with Dolby Digital with DTS
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
MP3/WMA disc
STREAM/PCM
DTS bitstream
Output Signals
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
Dolby Digital bitstream 48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
PCM ONLY
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DTS bitstream 44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
* While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the DVD
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
45
Spec&Index.fm Page 46 Friday, June 11, 2004 3:51 PM
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Audio Input
Digital output:
40 W (20 W + 20 W) at 4
Ω
(10% THD)
AUX: 400 mV/50 k
Ω
DVD OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm ±30 nm)
Video output:
Color system:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO: Y (luminance)
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT: (Y)
(P
B
Speakers/Impedance:
/P
R
)
NTSC/PAL selectable
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75
Ω
1 V(p-p)/75
Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75
Ω
4
Ω
– 16
Ω
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
AM (MW) tuning range:
Tape section
Frequency response:
Wow and flutter:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
522 kHz – 1 629 kHz
60 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio
CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (CD/SVCD/VCD/MP3/
WMA/JPEG format)
DVD-R/DVD-RW (Video format)
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
90 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
Speakers
Speaker units:
Impedance:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
Full-range: 10 cm cone x 1
4
Ω
145 mm x 230 mm x 191 mm
(W/H/D)
1.8 kg each
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
General
Power requirement:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (approx.):
Mass (approx.):
AC 240 V , 50 Hz
65 W (at operation)
1.5 W (on standby)
170 mm x 230 mm x 311 mm
(W/H/D)
4.8 kg
Parts Index
Refer to the pages to see how to use the buttons and controls.
Remote control
11, 12, 13,
16, 18–21,
26, 37
10, 13, 22, 28
9, 17
14
11, 16–20,
23
Main unit
8
Remote sensor
10
10–13,
22, 28
30
11, 13
20
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO
1
ZOOM
4
SUB TITLE
2
DVD LEVEL
5
ANGLE
3
VFP
6
REV. MODE
7
10
8
PROGRESSIVE
0
FM MODE
9
10
SLEEP
A.STANDBY
CLOCK/
TIMER
SET
TOP MENU
SET UP
MENU
ENTER
ON SCREEN CANCEL
RETURN
DVD/CD TAPE
REPEAT A-B
REPEAT
PLAY
MODE
GROUP/TITLE SLOW – SLOW +
DISPLAY
3D
PHONIC
BASS/
TREBLE RHYTHM AX
DIMMER
FADE
MUTING
VOLUME
RM-SUXP450U REMOTE CONTROL
STANDBY/ON
3D
PHONIC
RHYTHM AX
DVD/CD TAPE FM/AM AUX
REC DOWN UP
VOLUME
10
17
17, 31
14, 20,
25–31, 33
11, 13,
20–23, 28
15
15
10, 15
16
15
12
14
15
10, 15
13, 23
10
PHONES
46
Cover[A].fm Page 2 Tuesday, May 18, 2004 1:50 PM
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
EN
© 2004 VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
0504AIMMDWJEM
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement